Sie sind auf Seite 1von 300

AVEVA Marine

(12.1)

TRAINING GUIDE
Outfitting Foundations

TM-2201

www.aveva.com
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Revision Log
Date Revision Description of Revision Author Reviewed Approved
05/06/2011 0.1 Issued for Review – 12.1 SM
04/10/2011 0.2 Reviewed SM AM
13/10/2011 1.0 Approved for Training 12.1 SM AM SH
Approved for Training 12.1.SP2:

Section 5.4.3.4 – Add to Drawlist


option, note added stating Drawlist
graphical settings are not applied.

Section 5.6 – Images updated


throughout to show modification to
clipping slider bar configuration on
Advanced View Control form.

Section 5.6.1 – Additional note to cover


addition of FR, LH and LV allowable
13/01/2012 2.0 range tooltip. SM SM

Section 5.9 – Updated with additional


imperial unit examples

Chapter 6 – Images modified to show


addition of Filter button on Attributes
form. Images of Attributes form also
changed throughout guide.

Section 9.12 – Note stating pick


methods being mostly applicable for
Structural Modelling removed.

Updates
All headings containing updated or new material will be highlighted.

Suggestion / Problems
If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to the AVEVA
Training & Product Support at tps@aveva.com

This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may
not be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your
licence conditions.

Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free
from viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses;
loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or
information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or
expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the
inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are
suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the
user's claim is brought.

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software
licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take
precedence.

Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part
of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation
supplied with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this
document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is
granted, it expressly requires that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at
the beginning of every copy that is made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in
this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the
prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised
action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.

The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the
terms and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User
Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.

Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA
shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such
breach results from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.

AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom

Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised
use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.

AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).

The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its
name or logo belongs to its respective owner.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Contents

1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 13
1.1 Aim................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2 Objectives ....................................................................................................................................... 13
1.3 Prerequisites .................................................................................................................................. 13
1.4 Course Structure ............................................................................................................................ 13
1.5 Using this guide ............................................................................................................................. 13
2 How AVEVA Marine can Help You ....................................................................................................... 15
2.1 How AVEVA Marine is Structured ................................................................................................ 16
2.1.1 Monitor ..................................................................................................................................... 16
2.1.2 Hull Design ............................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.3 Hull Drafting.............................................................................................................................. 17
2.1.4 Outfitting ................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.5 Marine Draft.............................................................................................................................. 18
2.1.6 Diagrams .................................................................................................................................. 19
2.1.7 Schematic Model Manager ...................................................................................................... 19
2.1.8 Spooler ..................................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.9 Isodraft ..................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.10 Paragon .................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.11 Specon ..................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.12 Propcon .................................................................................................................................... 21
2.1.13 Lexicon ..................................................................................................................................... 21
2.1.14 Admin ....................................................................................................................................... 21
2.2 AVEVA Marine Databases ............................................................................................................. 22
2.3 How AVEVA Marine Data is Stored .............................................................................................. 23
2.3.1 World (WORL) .......................................................................................................................... 23
2.3.2 Site (SITE) ................................................................................................................................ 23
2.3.3 Zone (ZONE) ............................................................................................................................ 23
2.3.4 Equipment (EQUI) .................................................................................................................... 23
2.3.5 Sub-Equipment (SUBE) ........................................................................................................... 23
2.3.6 Volume (VOLM)........................................................................................................................ 24
2.3.7 Sub-Volume (SVOLM) ............................................................................................................. 24
2.3.8 Primitives .................................................................................................................................. 24
2.3.9 Structures (STRU) .................................................................................................................... 24
2.3.10 Framework (FRMW) ................................................................................................................. 24
2.3.11 Sub-Framework (SBFR) ........................................................................................................... 24
2.3.12 Structural Components ............................................................................................................ 24
2.3.13 Pipe (PIPE) ............................................................................................................................... 24
2.3.14 Branch (BRAN)......................................................................................................................... 24
2.3.15 Piping Components .................................................................................................................. 25
2.4 Navigating around the Database .................................................................................................. 25
2.4.1 Design Explorer ........................................................................................................................ 25
2.5 Ships Reference System ............................................................................................................... 27
2.5.1 Visualisation of Ships Reference System ................................................................................ 27
2.6 Displaying Coordinates ................................................................................................................. 28
2.6.1 Position wrt World .................................................................................................................... 28
3 Controlling AVEVA Marine .................................................................................................................... 29
3.1 Starting an Outfitting Session ...................................................................................................... 29
3.2 My Data ........................................................................................................................................... 30
3.3 Window Setup ................................................................................................................................ 31
3.4 Using the Mouse ............................................................................................................................ 31
3.4.1 Clicking ..................................................................................................................................... 31
3.4.2 Dragging ................................................................................................................................... 31
3.4.3 The Left Mouse Button ............................................................................................................. 32
3.4.4 The Middle Mouse Button ........................................................................................................ 32
3.4.5 The Right Mouse Button .......................................................................................................... 32
3.5 Using Menus ................................................................................................................................... 32
3.5.1 Pull-down Menus ...................................................................................................................... 32
3.5.2 Sub-Menus ...............................................................................................................................
www.aveva.com 33
3.6 Using Forms ................................................................................................................................... 33
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.6.1 Radio Buttons ........................................................................................................................... 34


3.6.2 Check Boxes ............................................................................................................................ 34
3.6.3 Text Boxes ............................................................................................................................... 34
3.6.4 Tabs ......................................................................................................................................... 34
3.6.5 Scrollable Lists ......................................................................................................................... 34
3.6.6 Buttons ..................................................................................................................................... 35
3.6.7 Link Labels ............................................................................................................................... 35
3.6.8 Fold Up Panels ......................................................................................................................... 35
3.6.9 Grids ......................................................................................................................................... 35
3.6.10 Form Menus ............................................................................................................................. 36
3.6.11 Actioning Form Inputs .............................................................................................................. 36
3.6.12 Alert Form ................................................................................................................................. 36
3.7 Accessing On-Line Help ................................................................................................................ 36
3.7.1 Contents ................................................................................................................................... 37
3.7.2 Search ...................................................................................................................................... 37
3.7.3 About ........................................................................................................................................ 37
3.8 Save Work ....................................................................................................................................... 37
3.9 Get Work ......................................................................................................................................... 37
3.10 Claim Lists ...................................................................................................................................... 37
3.10.1 Control ...................................................................................................................................... 38
3.10.2 Claim and Unclaim ................................................................................................................... 38
3.10.3 Colour ....................................................................................................................................... 38
3.10.4 Databases ................................................................................................................................ 39
3.11 Leaving AVEVA Marine (Exit) ....................................................................................................... 39
3.12 Session Comments Form .............................................................................................................. 39
3.13 Dockable Menus ............................................................................................................................. 40
3.14 Command Window ......................................................................................................................... 41
Exercise 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 41
4 Displaying Model Elements .................................................................................................................. 43
4.1 Principles of the 3D Display .......................................................................................................... 43
4.2 Building the Draw List ................................................................................................................... 43
4.2.1 Draw List .................................................................................................................................. 43
4.2.2 Using Drag and Drop ............................................................................................................... 44
4.2.3 From the Icon Menu ................................................................................................................. 44
4.2.4 From the Design Explorer ........................................................................................................ 44
4.3 Setting the View Limits .................................................................................................................. 45
4.3.1 Using the 3D View Controls ..................................................................................................... 45
4.3.2 Using the View Menu ............................................................................................................... 46
4.3.3 Using the 3D View Shortcut Menu ........................................................................................... 47
4.4 Setting the View Direction ............................................................................................................. 47
4.4.1 Using the View Menu ............................................................................................................... 47
4.4.2 Using the 3D shortcut View Menu ............................................................................................ 48
5 3D Views ................................................................................................................................................. 49
5.1 Multiple 3D Views ........................................................................................................................... 49
5.2 Manipulating the View ................................................................................................................... 50
5.2.1 Using the View Menu ............................................................................................................... 50
5.2.2 Using the 3D View Shortcut Menu ........................................................................................... 50
5.2.3 Using the Keyboard Function Keys .......................................................................................... 50
5.2.4 Using the 3D View Controls ..................................................................................................... 50
5.2.5 Setting the View Centre ........................................................................................................... 53
5.2.6 Using the 3D View Controls ..................................................................................................... 53
5.3 View Representation ...................................................................................................................... 54
5.3.1 Using the 3D View Controls ..................................................................................................... 54
5.4 Save & Restore View ..................................................................................................................... 59
5.4.1 The Save and Restore View form ............................................................................................ 59
5.4.2 Save & Restore View with Multiple 3D Views .......................................................................... 62
5.4.3 Creating and Using a Saved View – Worked Example ............................................................ 62
5.4.4 Using a Saved View with Multiple 3D Views ............................................................................ 69
5.5 Advanced View Control ................................................................................................................. 72
5.6 The Advanced View Control Form ............................................................................................... 72
5.6.1 Area Limits ............................................................................................................................... 73
5.6.2 www.aveva.com
Drawlist ..................................................................................................................................... 75
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.6.3 Utilities ...................................................................................................................................... 76


5.6.4 Show Grid ................................................................................................................................. 78
5.6.5 Advanced View Control – Worked Example ............................................................................ 79
5.7 Other View Menu Options ............................................................................................................. 85
5.7.1 Print Graphics........................................................................................................................... 85
5.7.2 Copy Image .............................................................................................................................. 85
5.7.3 Save View ................................................................................................................................ 85
5.7.4 View Settings ............................................................................................................................ 86
5.7.5 Translucency ............................................................................................................................ 87
5.7.6 Colours ..................................................................................................................................... 88
5.8 Graphical Settings Options ........................................................................................................... 89
5.8.1 3D Views .................................................................................................................................. 89
5.8.2 Colour ....................................................................................................................................... 90
5.8.3 Representation ......................................................................................................................... 91
5.8.4 Advanced Settings in Representation ...................................................................................... 93
5.8.5 Steelwork .................................................................................................................................. 96
5.8.6 Cabling ..................................................................................................................................... 97
5.8.7 Plines and P-Points .................................................................................................................. 98
5.9 AVEVA Marine Units ...................................................................................................................... 98
5.10 Measure Distance......................................................................................................................... 100
5.10.1 Units ....................................................................................................................................... 100
5.10.2 Measure ................................................................................................................................. 101
5.11 Measure Angle.............................................................................................................................. 104
Exercise 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 106
6 Attributes in AVEVA Marine ................................................................................................................ 107
6.1 Name ............................................................................................................................................. 108
6.2 Type ............................................................................................................................................... 108
6.3 Lock ............................................................................................................................................... 108
6.4 Owner ............................................................................................................................................ 108
6.5 Position ......................................................................................................................................... 109
6.6 Orientation .................................................................................................................................... 109
6.7 Level .............................................................................................................................................. 109
6.8 Obstruction ................................................................................................................................... 109
6.9 Height ............................................................................................................................................ 109
6.10 Diameter ........................................................................................................................................ 109
6.11 UDA User Defined Attributes ...................................................................................................... 110
6.12 The Attributes Form ..................................................................................................................... 110
6.12.1 WRT Element ......................................................................................................................... 111
6.12.2 Display Ppoints....................................................................................................................... 112
6.12.3 Track CE ................................................................................................................................ 112
6.12.4 Categorised/Alphabetical ....................................................................................................... 112
6.12.5 Expand Nodes and Collapse Nodes ...................................................................................... 113
6.12.6 Modify Category Filters .......................................................................................................... 113
6.12.7 Manage Category Filters ........................................................................................................ 113
6.12.8 Display Standard Attributes .................................................................................................... 114
6.12.9 Display UDAs ......................................................................................................................... 114
6.12.10 Display Pseudo Attributes .................................................................................................. 114
6.12.11 Columns ............................................................................................................................. 114
6.12.12 Settings............................................................................................................................... 115
6.12.13 Export to Excel ................................................................................................................... 115
6.12.14 Print Preview ...................................................................................................................... 116
6.13 Modifying Attributes .................................................................................................................... 116
6.14 Attribute Right-Mouse Options ................................................................................................... 117
6.14.1 Navigate To ............................................................................................................................ 117
6.14.2 Set Attribute Value to CE ....................................................................................................... 117
6.15 AVEVA Marine Equipment Attributes ........................................................................................ 118
6.16 LEVEL Attributes.......................................................................................................................... 118
7 3D Aid Constructs and Working Planes ............................................................................................ 119
7.1 Creating 3D Aid Constructs ........................................................................................................ 119
7.2 3D Aid Construct Form ................................................................................................................ 119
7.2.1 Control .................................................................................................................................... 119
7.2.2 www.aveva.com
Settings .................................................................................................................................. 120
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.2.3 Create ..................................................................................................................................... 120


7.2.4 Modify ..................................................................................................................................... 120
7.2.5 Delete ..................................................................................................................................... 120
7.2.6 Circle Constructs .................................................................................................................... 121
7.2.7 Line Constructs ...................................................................................................................... 122
7.2.8 Working Point Constructs ....................................................................................................... 122
7.2.9 Plane Constructs .................................................................................................................... 122
7.2.10 Grid Constructs ...................................................................................................................... 122
7.2.11 Linear Grid .............................................................................................................................. 123
7.2.12 Radial Grid ............................................................................................................................. 124
7.2.13 Plant Grid ............................................................................................................................... 125
7.3 User Grid System ......................................................................................................................... 125
7.3.1 3D Rectangular Grid .............................................................................................................. 126
7.3.2 3D Radial Grid ........................................................................................................................ 128
7.3.3 Display Grid Co-ordinates ...................................................................................................... 129
7.4 Copying and Modifying 3D Aid Constructs ............................................................................... 130
7.4.1 Copying 3D Aid Constructs .................................................................................................... 130
7.4.2 Offset ...................................................................................................................................... 130
7.4.3 Rotate ..................................................................................................................................... 130
7.4.4 Mirror ...................................................................................................................................... 131
7.5 Modifying 3D Aid Constructs ...................................................................................................... 131
7.5.1 Move ....................................................................................................................................... 132
7.5.2 Cut .......................................................................................................................................... 132
7.5.3 Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 132
7.5.4 Paste ...................................................................................................................................... 132
7.5.5 Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 132
7.5.6 Definition ................................................................................................................................ 133
7.5.7 Position ................................................................................................................................... 133
7.5.8 Radius .................................................................................................................................... 133
7.5.9 Extend .................................................................................................................................... 133
7.5.10 Project onto a Plane ............................................................................................................... 133
7.6 Working Planes ............................................................................................................................ 134
7.6.1 Creating Working Planes Explicitly ........................................................................................ 134
7.6.2 Pick ......................................................................................................................................... 134
7.6.3 Reposition .............................................................................................................................. 134
7.7 Worked Example (Creating 3D Aid Constructs) ....................................................................... 136
7.8 Worked Example Continues (Modifying and Copying 3D Aid Constructs) ........................... 138
8 Volumes ................................................................................................................................................ 141
8.1 Creating a Volume........................................................................................................................ 141
8.2 Creating a SubVolume ................................................................................................................. 142
8.3 Creating Primitives ...................................................................................................................... 142
8.3.1 Volume Representation using Levels .................................................................................... 144
8.3.2 Datum ..................................................................................................................................... 144
8.3.3 Position ................................................................................................................................... 144
8.3.4 Rotate ..................................................................................................................................... 144
8.3.5 Align with P-Point ................................................................................................................... 145
8.4 Creating Primitives (Continued) ................................................................................................. 145
9 Equipment ............................................................................................................................................ 149
9.1 Equipment Application ................................................................................................................ 149
9.2 Design Explorer............................................................................................................................ 149
9.3 Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................ 149
9.3.1 Equipment Toolbars ............................................................................................................... 149
9.4 Primitives ...................................................................................................................................... 150
9.5 AVEVA Marine Names ................................................................................................................. 150
9.6 SITE and ZONE ............................................................................................................................. 151
9.6.1 Creating a SITE ...................................................................................................................... 151
9.6.2 Creating a ZONE .................................................................................................................... 152
9.7 Creating a Group .......................................................................................................................... 152
9.7.1 Virtual Hierarchies .................................................................................................................. 154
9.8 Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 155
9.8.1 Creating an Equipment Element ............................................................................................ 155
9.9 The Axis System (Ships coordinate System) ............................................................................ www.aveva.com 156

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.9.1 Equipment and Primitive Orientation...................................................................................... 156


9.10 Creating Primitives ...................................................................................................................... 156
9.10.1 Creating an Extrusion ............................................................................................................. 157
9.10.2 Creating a Revolution ............................................................................................................. 159
9.10.3 Modifying Stretch / Trim a Primitive ....................................................................................... 163
9.10.4 Sliding a Primitive ................................................................................................................... 164
9.10.5 Checking the P-point Position of a Primitive .......................................................................... 164
9.11 List ................................................................................................................................................. 166
9.12 Positioning Control ...................................................................................................................... 168
9.13 Alternative Positioning Forms .................................................................................................... 172
9.13.1 Move Form ............................................................................................................................. 172
9.13.2 Positioning Using P-points ..................................................................................................... 178
9.13.3 Positioning Using PINs ........................................................................................................... 178
9.14 Positioning Equipment Point ...................................................................................................... 178
9.14.1 At Explicit ................................................................................................................................ 179
9.14.2 At General .............................................................................................................................. 180
9.14.3 Through .................................................................................................................................. 181
9.14.4 Clearance ............................................................................................................................... 183
9.15 Orientation .................................................................................................................................... 184
9.15.1 Orientate Axis ......................................................................................................................... 184
9.15.2 Orientate Rotate ..................................................................................................................... 185
9.15.3 Orientate Primitive Point ........................................................................................................ 186
9.16 Connect ......................................................................................................................................... 187
9.16.1 ID Point ................................................................................................................................... 187
9.16.2 Explicit .................................................................................................................................... 188
9.17 Model Editor ................................................................................................................................. 188
9.18 Set Increment Values ................................................................................................................... 189
9.19 Locking / Unlocking Objects ....................................................................................................... 190
9.20 Equipment Model Editor Pop-ups .............................................................................................. 191
9.20.1 Linear Handle Pop-ups .......................................................................................................... 191
9.20.2 Rotation Handle Pop-up ......................................................................................................... 192
9.21 Linear Movement (Enter Value) .................................................................................................. 193
9.22 Linear Movement (Align with Feature) ....................................................................................... 194
9.23 Moving the Model Editor Handle ................................................................................................ 195
9.24 Moving Equipment (Snap to Point) ............................................................................................ 196
9.25 Planar Moving (Enter Values) ..................................................................................................... 197
9.26 Angular Movement (Enter Value) ............................................................................................... 198
9.27 Angular Movement (Orient to Point) .......................................................................................... 199
9.28 Angular Movement (Align with Direction) ................................................................................. 200
9.29 Angular Movement (Align With) ................................................................................................. 201
9.30 Rotating the Model Editor Handle .............................................................................................. 202
9.31 Deleting an Equipment Primitive ................................................................................................ 203
9.32 Deleting an Equipment ................................................................................................................ 204
9.33 Editing Equipment Primitives Graphically ................................................................................ 205
Exercise 3 (Correcting Errors using Model Editor) .................................................................................. 207
9.34 Equipment Nozzles ...................................................................................................................... 208
9.35 Modifying the Nozzle Specification ............................................................................................ 209
9.36 Worked Example – Creating an Equipment .............................................................................. 210
9.36.1 Create the EQUI Element ...................................................................................................... 210
9.36.2 Creating Primitives ................................................................................................................. 211
9.36.3 Create Nozzles ....................................................................................................................... 213
9.36.4 Negative Primitive .................................................................................................................. 216
Exercise 4 - Create Equipment (Pressure Vessel) ................................................................................... 218
9.37 Standard Equipment – a Worked Example ................................................................................ 219
9.38 Selection Tables ........................................................................................................................... 223
9.39 Copying Equipment ..................................................................................................................... 224
Exercise 5 (Create Standard Equipment (Heat Exchangers)) ................................................................. 226
9.40 Modifying a Design Items System Attribute .............................................................................. 227
9.41 Creating Equipment Points ......................................................................................................... 229
9.42 Equipment Associations ............................................................................................................. 232
9.42.1 Modifying Associations ........................................................................................................... 234
9.42.2 www.aveva.com
Association Manager .............................................................................................................. 236
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.43 Standard Model Library ............................................................................................................... 239


9.43.1 Placing Items from the Standard Model Library ..................................................................... 239
10 Search Utility .................................................................................................................................... 245
10.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 246
10.1.1 Item Type ............................................................................................................................... 246
10.1.2 Search Filters ......................................................................................................................... 247
10.1.3 Attribute Filters ....................................................................................................................... 248
10.2 General Functionality on the Search Results Form ................................................................. 249
10.2.1 Displaying Search Results in Separate Tabs ......................................................................... 249
10.2.2 Setting of Columns in the Tabular Control ............................................................................. 253
10.2.3 Additional right click menus .................................................................................................... 259
11 Status Control .................................................................................................................................. 261
11.1 Activating the Status Controller ................................................................................................. 262
11.2 Status Control Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 263
11.3 Changing the Element‟s Status .................................................................................................. 263
11.4 Removing Status .......................................................................................................................... 264
11.5 Status History ............................................................................................................................... 264
11.6 Statistical Reports........................................................................................................................ 265
11.6.1 Changing the Graphical representation of the report ............................................................. 266
11.6.2 Additional Graphical Report Features .................................................................................... 267
11.6.3 The Element Interaction Toolbar ............................................................................................ 268
11.7 Saving a Status Layout ............................................................................................................... 269
12 Generating Equipment Reports ...................................................................................................... 271
12.1 Equipment Reports ...................................................................................................................... 271
12.2 Standard Reporting...................................................................................................................... 273
12.3 Running a Report from a Saved Template (Worked Example) ................................................ 274
12.4 Quick Reports............................................................................................................................... 276
12.4.1 Generating the Report ............................................................................................................ 276
Exercise 6 Reports ...................................................................................................................................... 276
13 Mass Properties ............................................................................................................................... 277
13.1 Mass Properties ........................................................................................................................... 277
13.1.1 Weight and Centre of Gravity ................................................................................................. 277
13.1.2 Surface Area .......................................................................................................................... 282
13.1.3 Volume ................................................................................................................................... 285
14 Clash Detection ................................................................................................................................ 287
14.1 Set-up and Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 287
14.1.1 Clashes which are Not Reported ........................................................................................... 287
14.1.2 Invoke the 3D Clash Utility ..................................................................................................... 287
14.1.3 Invoke the 3D Clash Utility ..................................................................................................... 288
14.2 Clashes ......................................................................................................................................... 289
14.3 Obstructions/Exclusions ............................................................................................................. 290
14.4 Limits ............................................................................................................................................. 290
14.5 Options .......................................................................................................................................... 291
14.5.1 Tolerances.............................................................................................................................. 291
14.5.2 Clash Options ......................................................................................................................... 292
14.5.3 Presentation ........................................................................................................................... 292
14.5.4 Clash Colours ......................................................................................................................... 293
14.5.5 Clashes Ignored Within .......................................................................................................... 293
14.6 Report ............................................................................................................................................ 293
Exercise 7 - Clash Detection ...................................................................................................................... 294
15 Appendix A (AVEVA Marine Primitives) ........................................................................................ 295
15.1 The Box Element (BOX) ............................................................................................................... 295
15.2 The Cylinder Element (CYLI) ....................................................................................................... 295
15.3 The Cone Element (CONE) .......................................................................................................... 296
15.4 The Dish Element (DISH) ............................................................................................................. 296
15.5 The Circular Torus Element (CTOR) .......................................................................................... 297
15.6 The Snout Element (SNOU) ......................................................................................................... 297
15.7 The Pyramid Element (PYRA) ..................................................................................................... 298
15.8 The Slope-Bottom Cylinder (SLCY) ............................................................................................ 298
15.9 The Nozzle Element (NOZZ) ........................................................................................................ 299
15.10 The Rectangular Torus Element (RTOR) ............................................................................... 299
15.11 www.aveva.com
The Extrusion (EXTRU)............................................................................................................ 300

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

15.12 Revolution (REVO) ................................................................................................................... 300

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 1

1 Introduction

The AVEVA Marine basic functions are the common features within the Design modules, and this training
course will be taken by all users of the system, and will provide the grounding for further training in the other
AVEVA Marine Outfitting applications.

The design Modules, Equipment, Piping, etc. all require knowledge of the basic functions. This course is
designed to give a comprehensive introduction to the concept and Basic features of AVEVA Marine.

1.1 Aim

Over three days the participants will learn the basic functions to control the graphical view, to create and
modify equipment, collision control and reporting.

1.2 Objectives

 To have a clear understanding of the basic features of AVEVA Marine.


 To familiarise users with the screen layout and the workings of the user interface.
 To create and manipulate views of an existing model.
 To discover the ways in which the model can be interpreted on screen.
 To understand the various ways in which we can modify the object attributes.
 To create primitives and understand the primitive attributes.
 To be able to create and place new equipment‟s in the ship model complete with nozzle
connections.
 To be able to generate equipment reports.
 To be able to run clash detection.

1.3 Prerequisites

Trainees should be familiar with Microsoft Windows.

1.4 Course Structure

Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations and set exercises. Each workstation
will have a training project, populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees to practice their
methods, and complete the set exercises.

1.5 Using this guide

Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document, here is a summary;

Menu pull downs and button click actions are indicated by bold turquoise text.
Information the user has to key-in will be in bold red text.
Annotation for trainees benefit

 Additional information

1.5.1.1 System prompts should be bold, italic and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose
function'
Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 14
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 2

2 How AVEVA Marine can Help You

The AVEVA Marine System is a Multi-Discipline 3D Modelling System that allows the user to simulate a fully
detailed, full size model.

AVEVA Marine allows the user to see a full colour shaded representation of the model as your design
progresses, adding an unprecedented level of realism to drawing office techniques.

In the model the user can store huge amounts of data referring to position, size, part numbers and geometric
relationships for the various parts of the ship. This model becomes a single source of engineering data for all
of the sections and disciplines involved in a design project.

All this information is stored in databases. There are many different output channels from the databases
through which information can be distributed, these range from reports on data stored in the databases, fully
annotated and dimensioned engineering drawings, to full colour shaded 3D walk through capabilities which
allow visualisation of the complete design model.

AVEVA
Marine
Databases

Even with the advanced features of AVEVA Marine, the main form of communication between the designer
and those who build the ships remains the drawings. Without engineering drawings the task of building a
ship would almost be impossible. To meet this requirement, AVEVA Marine can produce numerous types of
drawings, ranging from complex 3D illustrations to fully dimensioned arrangement drawings and piping
isometrics.

All the data in AVEVA Marine design would be of little value without the ability to ensure the quality of the
design information. It would be pointless to develop such a large system if it could not improve on existing
techniques. AVEVA Marine contributes to the quality of the design in the following ways.

Ensures consistent and reliable component data

In a conventional design environment, using 2D drawing techniques, the size of each fitting must be decided
before it can be drawn. This is a time consuming process that often leads to expensive errors, which are
only found during the erection stage of the project. With AVEVA Marine, all piping component sizes and
geometry are predefined and stored in a catalogue, which cannot be changed by the designer. This ensures
that all items are true to size and are consistent throughout the design, no matter how many users there are
on the project.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Adheres to definable engineering specifications

Piping specifications and steelwork catalogues stating precisely the components to be used are compiled for
the purpose of ensuring consistent, safe and economic design. Design applications for Piping, HVAC, Cable
trays and Steelwork all use specifications to control user selection of the components.

Ensures correct geometry and connectivity

There are many different ways of making design errors, such as incorrect fitting lengths, incompatible flange
ratings, or simple alignment errors. AVEVA Marine can check all of these using data consistency procedures
built into the system to check all or just individual parts of the design model.

Avoids component interferences

Despite a wealth of skill and experience in shipbuilding design, traditional drawing office techniques are still
subject to human error. Laying out complex pipe runs, and general arrangements in confined areas using
conventional 2D methods, inevitably leads to clashes between elements, which are trying to share the same
physical space. AVEVA Marine enables the user to avoid such problems in two ways.

 By viewing the design interactively during the design process, allowing visual checks on the
model from different viewpoints resolves any potential problems as they arise.

 By using the powerful clash checking facility within AVEVA Marine, which will detect clashes
anywhere in the model, this can be done interactively or retrospectively.

Annotation and dimensions obtained directly from the design database

Extracted information from the AVEVA Marine database, such as Arrangement Drawings, Piping Isometrics,
Reports, etc. will always be the latest available, as it is stored only in one source. Through the course of a
project, information is constantly changing and drawings need to be reissued. When this happens, drawings,
reports etc. can be updated and reissued with the minimum amount of effort.

2.1 How AVEVA Marine is Structured

Because of its large overall size, AVEVA Marine is subdivided into a number of functional modules. Each
module accesses the databases for a different purpose. The modules and their purpose are listed below.

Monitor Controls entry into AVEVA Marine


Hull Design 3D Hull Design
Hull Drafting 2D Hull Drawing Production
Outfitting 3D Outfitting Design
Outfitting Draft 2D Outfit Drawing Production
Diagrams Cable / Piping / HVAC Diagrams
Schematic Model Manager Import P&ID data into
Schematic databases
Spooler Spools for Fabrication
Isodraft Isometric Drawing Production
Paragon Catalogue Construction
Specon Specification Construction
Propcon Properties Construction
Lexicon User Defined Attributes
Admin Project / User Control
 Admin and Lexicon are only available if logged in as a free user

2.1.1 Monitor

Monitor is the AVEVA Marine module which controls your entry into AVEVA Marine. Normally users enter
AVEVA Marine via the Interface. www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.1.2 Hull Design

Hull Design is an AVEVA Marine application used for the preliminary definition and arrangement of ship‟s
structures. The system supports important decisions regarding the preliminary geometry definition and
arrangement of principal structural members, and provides the framework for associated design guidance.

The preliminary structural definition developed by Hull Design can be directly used by other AVEVA Marine
Production applications for detailed design and preparation of production information (Hull, Outfit, Assembly
Planning etc).

2.1.3 Hull Drafting

Hull Drafting is for the creation of drawings using the data in the model database. It contains extensive
general 2D drafting functions and special-purpose functions to meet the particular needs of marine
drawings.

A range of marine-industry-specific functions include is;

 Symbolic-type hull views, automatically created from the model


 Automatic section details of model parts
 Frame and longitudinal position rulers, centre line and base line
 Shell profile mounting angles

Graphical workspace

 The graphical workspace is built up from the model or a part of the model. Drawing views of the
model can contain subviews, can overlap each other, and can have annotations, dimensions and
texts. The designer freely creates views in his drawing with defined positions and orientations in the
model.

Symbolic or 3D drawings

 The model can be displayed either with a symbolic representation of hull parts such as stiffeners,
seams, notches and drain holes, or with full three-dimensional representation. Symbolic views are
traditional for classification and hull workshop drawings, while the full representation can be used for
assembly and erection drawings. Model view generation, including hidden line removal and
generation of shaded images

Full associatively

 Drawing views remain connected to the model and can be automatically updated when model
changes are made. This maintains consistency between the model and its related drawings,
reducing time spent documenting the design and eliminating common sources of errors.

2.1.4 Outfitting

Outfitting is the main, graphically driven constructor module within AVEVA Marine. In this module the model
is built and the data stored in one or more databases. The databases contain a three-dimensional
description of all items in the model. Component selection is provided through specifications that dictate
which catalogue components can be used.

The main features are;

 Create new outfitting elements.


 Modify existing outfitting elements.
 Interrogate and View the design model interactively by graphical manipulation.
 Create Reports to detail MTO‟s, Project pricing, Project timing, Customisation of user defined
requirements etc.
 Run a Clash detection application to check interference between design elements.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 17
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.1.5 Marine Draft

Outfitting Draft is used to create and manipulate drawings, annotation and dimensioning. The annotation can
be in the form of labels attached to design elements, or 2D annotation such as drawing notes, or drawing
frames, tables, lines etc.

Annotation attached to a design data element on the drawing will move if the 3D position of the element
changes. Dimensions are projected distances between connecting points (P-Point) in the 3D design. The
dimension itself is calculated automatically and is recalculated every time the drawing is updated. The
design database can be interrogated through the drawing database, but it cannot be changed from within
the Outfitting Draft module.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 18
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.1.6 Diagrams

Marine Diagrams supports the creation of Piping, HVAC and Cabling diagrams. The application is based on
the AVEVA Marine common framework GUI and diagram layouts are created using an embedded Microsoft
Office Visio drawing control. All relevant data entered through the application is stored into the schematic
database.

The functions available in the application include standard MS Visio functions, standard AVEVA Marine
functions, and specific Marine Diagrams functions.

2.1.7 Schematic Model Manager

AVEVA Schematic Model Manager is a module that can be licensed for use with the existing AVEVA Marine
installation.

It is used to import P&ID data (XML format) the content of which complies with ISO 15926 into Schematic
databases, and to view and manage this data. The P&ID data can then be used for 3D modelling through
the use of the Schematic 3D Integrator.

2.1.8 Spooler

SPOOLER is the pipework spooling module for AVEVA Marine. It allows the user to split the pipework
design into logical sections (spools) ready for fabrication. The spool data can then be output as isometric
drawings using ISODRAFT.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.1.9 Isodraft

Isodraft produces dimensioned


symbolic piping isometrics for
construction and erection purposes.
This module produces isometric
drawings in various formats, as
required. Its facilities include;

 Full material lists


 Automatic spool identification
 Automatic splitting of complex
drawings
 User-defined drawing sheets
 Many other options that can be
selected at the production
stage

2.1.10 Paragon

Paragon is used to input and modify the component catalogue stored in the project database. The
catalogues in AVEVA Marine serve a similar purpose to the manufacturers‟ catalogues, which the user
would refer to when using conventional design methods. The AVEVA Marine component catalogue is used
to specify the geometry, connection information, obstruction and detailing data of Steelwork, Piping, HVAC
and Cable Tray components.

This module is used to construct the component catalogue just as Design is used to construct the design
data. The catalogue data is structured hierarchically in its own database. It should be noted that, where the
design data is specific to a particular design, catalogues and specifications may be specific to a company
but general to a number of projects in that company. i.e., the same catalogue component may also appear in
other designs taking place at the same time

2.1.11 Specon

SPECON, the AVEVA Marine Specification Constructor module, is used to create or modify the Specification
(SPEC) elements in Catalogue Databases.

These Specifications govern the choice of components from the catalogue. They must have been set up,
together with the rest of the Catalogue DB, before design work takes place. In principle, therefore, SPECON
will be one of the first modules to be used when a new AVEVA Marine project is initiated, although in
practice it is likely that a company-wide library of Catalogues and Specifications will be created
independently of any individual design project and accessed by subsequent users to ensure overall
standardisation and quality control.

SPECON enables the user to input new Specifications, to modify existing Specifications, and to output
Specifications to a terminal or to a file (to be printed or input again at a later date).

A facility is provided so that the user can make changes to a Specification without losing compatibility
between existing design data and earlier versions of that Specification. This is achieved by maintaining valid
references to obsolete components in the Specification while preventing their selection in new designs.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.1.12 Propcon

This module is used to construct a Properties database. The database contains data for use with design
databases as well as stress analysis packages and includes;

 Material properties
 Component data

2.1.13 Lexicon

This module enables User Definable Attributes (UDA‟s), User System Definable Attribute (USDA), User
Definable Element Types (UDETS) and Status Values (STAVAL) to be assigned to AVEVA Marine elements
so that additional information may be stored in the databases and extracted into drawings and reports.

2.1.14 Admin

Large models designed using AVEVA Marine will usually be broken down into individual areas (either
physical areas or design areas), depending on the physical size, complexity and configuration of the ship.
On a large project, the System Administrator will first agree with the Project and Design Management, the
breakdown of the AVEVA Marine project into sections which are:

 Relevant to the needs of project reporting and control


 Form reasonable design subdivisions with sensible match-lines and design content
 Enabling enough designers to work in parallel with simultaneous access to carry out their design
tasks

In much the same way as in a design office (with its section leader, draughtspersons, etc.), AVEVA Marine
has Teams, the members of which are called Users. These Teams can consist of any number of Users and
can be organised by discipline or physical work areas.

The main features are:

 Access Control (Teams and Users)


 Databases (DB‟s)
 Multiple Databases (MDBs)
 Database management functionality

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 21
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.2 AVEVA Marine Databases

The heart of AVEVA Marine consists of a set of hierarchical databases that store the model data. The
database system is called Dabacon and is exclusive to AVEVA.

The databases are structured specifically for design data storage and each type of database stores different
data.

Design databases, where data for the model constructed in the Design module is stored, can be of two
types:

 Update, where each user has their own database to work in.
 Multi Write, where a number of users work in the same database.

Generally multi-discipline projects are executed using discipline specific designers who will use specific
applications in AVEVA Marine to construct the model components for their specific discipline. A project,
therefore, may consist of a number of Design databases for each discipline.

When constructing the model, references are made to catalogue; property and user defined attribute data
that is held in different types of databases. As this data is common to all users of each discipline, each user
will refer to a common set of data for the project. These databases are called Reference databases.

In order that each user can see the required design components modelled by other users and refer to the
common catalogue, property and user defined attribute data, the Design and Reference databases are
grouped together into a Multiple Database (MDB).

There may be several MDB‟s for a project, each defining specific groups of databases, for users with
different tasks to perform.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 22
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.3 How AVEVA Marine Data is Stored

Despite the huge power and potential of AVEVA Marine, the database is structured in a very simple and
logical form. The database is hierarchical, i.e. a tree like structure, as illustrated below.

In this hierarchical structure all elements


are owned by other elements, with the
exception of the WORLD. Elements that
are owned by another element, i.e. a
ZONE is owned by a SITE, are said to be
members of the owning element, i.e. the
ZONE is a member of the SITE. Most
element types are abbreviated when they
appear in the hierarchy; the abbreviations
are shown in parenthesis.

2.3.1 World (WORL)

When the database is first built, it is empty except for a single element named the World. Each database
has its own World element as the first element in the hierarchy.

2.3.2 Site (SITE)

Below the World, the second level of the hierarchy is SITE. A SITE may be considered as a significant
collection of area of the model, whose size is not necessarily determined by physical area, but by practical
considerations. It may, i.e. be the whole project, or one part of a large project. The user can have as many
SITEs within an AVEVA Marine project as required for data organisation.

2.3.3 Zone (ZONE)

The next level below a SITE is a Zone. Again, a Zone is not necessarily used to define a physical area; it is
more likely to store similar types of item for easy reference, such as a piping system in one ZONE, related
equipment in another, and so on. The user can have as many Zones owned by a SITE as required for data
organisation.

SITE and ZONE elements are common to all disciplines. Below ZONE level the hierarchy is discipline
dependent, i.e. the elements depend on which discipline the user is modelling.

2.3.4 Equipment (EQUI)

Equipment items are built up in AVEVA Marine using elements known as primitives. Each piece of
equipment can comprise any number of primitive shapes positioned to form the item. The primitives may be
owned directly by the EQUI element or by a Sub-Equipment element.

2.3.5 Sub-Equipment (SUBE)

www.aveva.com
A SUBE is an optional element to further sub-divide an EQUI. The SUBE can own primitive elements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 23


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.3.6 Volume (VOLM)

Volume items are built up in AVEVA Marine using elements known as primitives. Each piece of a volume
can comprise any number of primitive shapes positioned to form the item. The primitives may be owned
directly by the VOLM element or by a Sub-Volume element.

2.3.7 Sub-Volume (SVOLM)

A SVOLM is an optional element to further sub-divide a VOLM. The SVOLM can own primitive elements.

2.3.8 Primitives

Primitives are the basic building blocks of AVEVA Marine. They are used by other disciplines to create
catalogue components. There are many types of primitives; each with its own features which when
combined with other primitives can represent complex shapes. Examples of primitives are nozzle (NOZZ),
box (BOX), cylinders (CYLI), pyramids (PYRA) etc.

2.3.9 Structures (STRU)

STRU elements are administrative elements, i.e. they exist to own Framework elements, and allow the
structures to be separated for ease of modelling and reporting. STRU elements are owned by a ZONE
element.

2.3.10 Framework (FRMW)

FRMW elements are used to store structural components in the model. A complex structure can be divided
into logical frameworks. Dividing the structure in this way allows structural modelling, and also reporting, to
be done more efficiently, i.e. by copying a complete FRMW. Structural components may also be owned by a
Sub-Framework element.

2.3.11 Sub-Framework (SBFR)

A SBFR is an optional element that can own structural components. They are used to further sub-divide
complex projects or for modelling sub-assemblies within a framework.

2.3.12 Structural Components

Structural profiles are represented in AVEVA Marine by section (SCTN) elements. Profile sizes are selected
using a section specification that references standard catalogue data for section sizes complying with
various national standards. Plate elements are represented by panel (PANE) elements and curved profiles
are modelled using a general section (GENSEC) component.

2.3.13 Pipe (PIPE)

Pipes (PIPE elements) may be considered like lines on a flow sheet. They may run between several end
connection points and are usually grouped by a common specification and process. PIPE elements are
owned by a ZONE element.

2.3.14 Branch (BRAN)

Branch (BRAN) elements are sections of a pipe, which have known start and finish points. In AVEVA Marine
the start and finish points are called the Head and Tail. Heads and tails may be connected to nozzles, tees
or other Heads and tails, depending on the configuration of the pipe, or just left open ended.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 24
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.3.15 Piping Components

A BRAN can own a wide variety of components such as gaskets (GASK), flanges (FLAN), tees (TEE),
valves (VALV), elbows (ELBO), etc. These form the shape and geometry of the BRAN and ultimately the
pipeline itself.

Piping components are selected using Piping Specifications that reference standard catalogue data. i.e.,
each time the user wants to use a 100mm bore elbow, AVEVA Marine always accesses the data for it from
the component catalogue. The data for these remains constant no matter how many 100mm bore elbows
are used in the design.

2.4 Navigating around the Database

Navigation in AVEVA Marine refers to moving around within the database hierarchy. In the Design module
AVEVA Marine provides two methods of navigating through the hierarchy, the Design Explorer, and the
Members List.

2.4.1 Design Explorer

The Design Explorer provides an easy-to-use graphical method of exploring the Design databases and is
displayed when AVEVA Marine is opened.

Design Explorer provides a „Tree View‟ display of database elements in the


current MDB, which can be expanded and contracted, where applicable, by
clicking the + or – icons. The icons in the Tree View opposite the element
names represent the different database element types.

The expression, Current Element, (sometimes referred to as CE in the text


and on user interface forms) is that element of the design the user is currently
positioned at.

The Current Element can be identified in the Design Explorer as the highlighted item in the Tree View or
the History List which contains a list of recently visited items.

A pop-up menu is available using the right mouse click,


this allows the user to Add / Remove elements to / from
the 3D view, Show Attributes, Rename an element,
Delete an element, Add elements to My Data, open a
New Explorer (at element or owner element) and Copy
and Paste functionality.

In this example we have selected New Explorer; a new


Explorer is opened, this time with just the point and
below where we chose to open a new explorer from.

 The Design Explorer replaces most of the functions of the Members List in AVEVA Marine Design,
although if desired to navigate to a database other than the Design database the user must use the
Members List selecting Display > Members
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 25
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.4.1.1 Explorer Settings

The Explorer Settings allow the user to set display characteristics of the Design Explorer. Select Settings
> Explorer. The Explorer Settings form appears.

The options are;

Auto Collapse Tree If selected, whenever the user changes CE, any expanded node
not containing the selected CE is automatically collapsed. This
applies to all active explorers. Note that this option is disabled if
Expand to CE is not selected.
Expand to CE When selected this automatically expands the tree when the CE
changes (if not already expanded).
Display Folders TBA
Hide non-user System Data When selected this hides all non-user System Data to hide
information that may not be relevant to the user.

Show TUBI/ROD When selected this displays all TUBI and ROD elements in
Explorer

2.4.1.2 History List

The History Add-in appears on the main toolbar in Design, Draft, Spooler and Isodraft. It displays the
current element (CE), regardless of the database. The user can set the CE either by typing the element
name into the combo box, selecting a previously typed in element from the drop-down list, navigating
through the CE history one element at a time using the backwards and forwards buttons or by selecting
elements from the CE history list using drop-downs on the backwards / forwards buttons. When typing into
the combo box the system attempts to auto complete the name by scanning the open databases for the first
15 matches and displaying them in a pop-up list. The user can then either carry on typing or select an
element from the list. When docked vertically the toolbar displays only the backwards and forwards buttons;
the combo box is not displayed.

Clicking on an element in the list will navigate to the selected element. The left and right arrows next to the
history list will navigate up and down the list one element at a time.

AVEVA Marine databases may contain many thousands of elements; however, only one element can be
accessed at a time. As all elements (with the exception of the World) are owned by another element,
deleting, say, a Zone would cause everything owned by that Zone to also be deleted.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 26
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.5 Ships Reference System

AVEVA Marine incorporates a sophisticated ships coordinate system and the means to represent this
through visualisation using the Ship Reference Grids form.

There are three orthogonal grids the user gets when displayed the ships
reference grid. In this view we are looking from the Aft (stern) to the
forward (bow). The axes system is labelled FR for Frame and LP for
Longitudinal Position

The purpose of defining the planes is so that the user can refer to them
when modelling either parts of the steel structure or the outfitting
objects.

2.5.1 Visualisation of Ships Reference System

To display the form for visualising the current ship reference system select Utilities > Ship Reference
Grids. The Ship Reference Grids form appears,

 The form can be docked but


initially it appears undocked

 The ship reference grids will


remain visible even if the
form is closed

The form has two main sections:

Display Reference Grids for, lets the user display or hide the main gridlines in the 3D graphics window
FR Gridlines Displays a longitudinal grid in the XY axes
LH Gridlines Displays a horizontal grid in the XZ axes
LV Gridlines Displays a vertical grid in the YZ axes

Position Grid Planes and Tags Through, lets the user define the position through which the system draws
grids and tags

FR, LH and LV Defines the gridlines through which the system draws the displayed grids
and along which it draws the grid tags
Tag every Lets the user define the spacing of the tags for the relevant gridlines

For each Grid Plane the user can alter the colour by clicking in the current
colour box.

This will open the X/Y/Z Line Colour form allowing the user to select the
new colour. Indicating the new colour from the form immediately changes
the appearance of the grid in the graphical view.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 27
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

2.6 Displaying Coordinates

To display co-ordinate axes, click the Display Axes on CE icon from the Utilities Toolbar or select Query >
Axes. The user will see the Define Axes form, and the axes will be shown, by default, at the origin of the
current element.

To position the axes, use the Select menu options.

CE positions the axes at the current element.


Owner positions the axes at the owner of the current element.
Pick prompts the user to pick an item in the 3D View. This need not
be a database element; it can be a graphical aid, a P-Point, etc.
The Axes are shown on the picked item.
(For a P-Point, only its direction is displayed).
Pick Owner prompts the user to pick an item in the 3D View. The axes
are shown on the owner of the picked item.
Label displays the element name of the element whose axes are
shown.
Cardinal Directions shows the X, Y, Z axes (with respect to World), rather than the
local X, Y, Z axes for the tagged element.

Size defines the length of the axes shown. Enter a suitable length for the axes lines, depending on the scale
of the viewed item.

Changes to the displayed axes take effect immediately. The Close menu options determine
whether the axes remain displayed (Retain axes) or are dismissed (Remove axes) when the
form is dismissed. Closing the form using the window icons is equivalent to Close > Retain
axes

2.6.1 Position wrt World

This is the position with respect to the world i.e. absolute co-ordinates, in AVEVA Marine each element has
a default orientation, they all lie in a particular orientation with respect to the axis system labelled X, Y and Z.
These axes relate to the World co-ordinates as follows;

X = FORWARD -X = AFT X = EAST -X = WEST


Y = PORT -Y = STARBOARD Y = NORTH -Y = SOUTH
Z = UP -Z = DOWN Z = UP -Z = DOWN

Ship Coordinates are displayed at the bottom of the design framework where available if the Hull gentab file
has been set up.

 Further information on gentab file is covered in AVEVA Project Administration (Hull) (TM-2122) Guide

Coordinates are set to X, Y, Z by default but can be changed to E, N, U by selecting Settings >
Coordinates

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 28
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 3

3 Controlling AVEVA Marine

3.1 Starting an Outfitting Session

To start the AVEVA Marine application, select All Programs > AVEVA Marine>
Design > Marine 12.1 > Outfitting

The AVEVA Marine - Outfitting Login form appears, enter the following data:

Project Training
Username EQUIP
Password EQUIP
MDB EQUIPMENTFWD,

Then click the Login button.

Setting the project to Training on the AVEVA Marine – Outfitting Login form will result in the use of the
Marine Training Project, this will be referred to as MTP for the remainder of this guide.

A default screen layout will be displayed comprising the application pull-down menu and a Design Explorer
showing all the objects from the current project database. The user can reposition and, in some cases,
resize the Outfitting windows.

Once the Outfitting module has been started, the user must check that the
required application is running. This can be seen on the top of the design
framework. If it does not the correct application, select Design > from the
application pull-down menu to change to the correct application. For this
training guide Equipment needs to be selected

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 29
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.2 My Data

The My Data window is used to group data into collections. The user can then carry out operations on all the
items in a collection in one action. The My Data window is accessed by selecting Display > My Data from
the main pull down menu.

Using this window, the user can generate


collections of database elements which the user
may need to work on. Each time the user
accesses the My Data window, in any of the
AVEVA Marine modules that use it (Outfitting
Draft, Design and Spooler), the data collections
generated will be displayed. This enables
elements to be easily transferred between these
modules.

The content of My Data is supported between


applications and module switching, as well as
between AVEVA Marine sessions. The data is
stored, per project in the AVEVA Marine user
serialization files (C:\Documents and
Settings\<user.name>\Local Settings\Application
Data\Aveva\PDMS\<prj>ProjectSettings). This
means that in Design, the user could add
elements to My Data and then switch to Draft to
use the same data.

The window consists of three areas.

The Collections grid This lists all the collections that have been specified
as "My Data". It also lists individual
or orphaned "My Data" elements which are
not part of a collection.
The Actions pane This is used to carry out actions on
collections and orphaned elements selected
in the Collections grid.
The Contents grid This displays all the elements in the collection
selected in the Collections grid.

The Collections list displays the status, name and type of each collection and
orphaned element. The list may be sorted by name or by type, either by clicking
on the appropriate heading, or right-clicking on an empty area in the grid and
selecting one of the Arrange By menu options.

The Contents grid displays the status, name, type and source database of each
item in the collection currently selected in the Collections grid. The Contents
grid may be sorted by name, type or database, using the same methods as for
the Collections grid. Except for the names of collections, all data in the
Collections and Contents grids is read only.

 There is also a right click option from the Contents section of the
form, this displays a context sensitive menu allowing the user to
Remove selected from Collection, Resolve inconsistency,
Edit, Navigate To, 3D_View, Datal Listing and Find Referred
elements.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 30
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.3 Window Setup

Entering AVEVA Marine the main window is displayed;

The features of the main window shown at this stage are:

Main Menu - contains


application command
menus.
3D View Window - the
window in which the design
model will be displayed.
This window has horizontal
and vertical tool bars.
Prompt Area - the main
prompts are displayed
here.
Status Area - displays
viewing parameter status
information. Prompts are
displayed here when
graphical interaction is
required.

The user can reposition or minimise the main window at any time by using the standard window
management facilities provided by your workstation. It is suggested that not to close them from the window
controls – select the “Dismiss” and “Close” option.

3.4 Using the Mouse

The mouse steers the graphics pointer around the screen and is also used to select or „pick‟ items by using
the mouse buttons. The buttons perform different tasks depending on the type of window and the position
within the window, where the pointer is positioned. The appearance of the pointer will change according to
the type of display item that is underneath it. The functions of each of the buttons are described below.
 A three button mouse is required for AVEVA Marine

There are two techniques when operating the mouse buttons, Clicking and Dragging.

3.4.1 Clicking

The pointer is positioned over a specific point on the screen and then picks whatever is displayed at that
point by quickly clicking and releasing a mouse button. This is used to identify items in graphical views, for
„clicking‟ buttons on forms, and for selecting lines in scrollable lists.

3.4.2 Dragging

Place the pointer over a specific point on the screen and then click and hold down a mouse button while
moving the pointer. To complete the operation release the button when the pointer is positioned over a
second specific point on the screen. Mainly used for manipulating the design model in graphical views, and
for moving complete windows about on the screen.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 31
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.4.3 The Left Mouse Button

The left mouse button is the main button for selecting items. On a graphical view, clicking the left–hand
button with the pointer over a design element results in that element becoming the current element. In a
sequence of menus, dragging with the left mouse button activates the command represented by the
highlighted menu option when the button is released. On a form, the effect depends on the type of selections
that are being made.

3.4.4 The Middle Mouse Button

The principal use of the middle mouse button in the Design module is to manipulate the 3D graphical view.

3.4.5 The Right Mouse Button

Clicking the right mouse button displays a screen menu. The screen menu options depend on the current
module. In the Design module the choices relate to view manipulation.

3.5 Using Menus

There are two types of menu, Pull-down Menus and Sub-menus

3.5.1 Pull-down Menus

Clicking an item on the menu bar with the left mouse button will display the pull-down menu items.

As the pointer is passed over the menu items they are highlighted
in turn. There are three types of options on a pull-down menu
which result in different actions

Pull down
menu

Options followed by a triangular pointer:


When this type of option is highlighted moving the pointer to the right,
keeping the option highlighted, will display a Sub-menu.

Option followed by three dots:


When this type of option is highlighted clicking the left- hand mouse button
will dismiss the pull-down menu and display a form for data entry or
modification.
Option shown as plain text:
When this type of option is highlighted clicking the left mouse button will
directly perform the action described in the menu item.

 If no menu item is required, clicking the left mouse button in the 3D View Window will dismiss the pull-
down menu
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 32
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.5.2 Sub-Menus

As described above, highlighting a menu item which is followed by a triangular pointer and moving the
pointer to the right will display a sub-menu.

Sub-menus may contain any of the


three menu options described
above. If none of the menu items
are required, highlighting another
option on the pull-down menu will
dismiss the sub-menu. Alternatively,
clicking the left mouse button in the
3D View Window will dismiss the
pull-down as well as the sub-menu.

Pull down
menu

Sub menu

3.6 Using Forms

Many of the forms can be positioned, resized and docked on the screen as required these positions will be
remembered for the next time the user enters AVEVA Marine. The forms are moved and docked using the
standard windows mouse commands.

Forms are used to display information, often about current data settings, enter data and to modify data.

Forms typically comprise an arrangement of Buttons, Text Boxes, Radio Buttons, Check Boxes and
Scrollable Lists (sometimes collectively referred to as controls).

Radio Buttons Check Boxes Text Boxes Tabs

Buttons Scrollable Lists


Input to a form is usually via a combination of mouse and keyboard, the mouse being used to select the
appropriate controls and the keyboard to enter the data.

When a form is displayed, settings can be changed, reset to initial values, accept and act on data input, or
cancelled without applying any changes, depending on the design of the form. www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 33
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.6.1 Radio Buttons

Radio buttons are combined in groups and only permit one selection of the group to be set ON, i.e. the radio
button with the black dot in the centre.

To set the radio button ON move the pointer over the radio button or associated text and click the left mouse
button.

Turning a radio button on will automatically turn the other radio button(s) in the group OFF.

3.6.2 Check Boxes

A check box may be either ON, i.e. a checkmark (tick) is displayed in the box, or OFF, i.e. the box has no
checkmark displayed. Check boxes do not interact so any combination of check boxes on a form may be ON
or OFF. To change the status of a check box, i.e. to set it ON or OFF, move the pointer over the check box
or associated text and click the left mouse button.

3.6.3 Text Boxes

Text boxes are the areas where alphanumeric data, i.e. names, dimensions, values, etc., can be entered. A
text box will generally have a label describing or qualifying the data required.

To enter data into a text box, move the pointer into the box and click the left–hand mouse button. Using the
keyboard, type in the required data, editing any existing entry as necessary. The Backspace key will clear
the box of any content. When complete, acceptance of the input is confirmed the by clicking the Return (or
Enter) key.

When first displaying a form containing text boxes, the first text box on the form will be current and a text
pointer (a vertical bar) will be displayed in the box. A text box often contains a default entry when first
displayed. Some text boxes will accept only text or only numeric data, and entries with the wrong type of
data will not be accepted.

3.6.4 Tabs

Tabs are used to change to a new page of the form.

3.6.5 Scrollable Lists

A scrollable list is displayed as a vertical list of options within a form, with vertical scroll bar on the right hand
side of the list and, if appropriate, a horizontal scroll bar along the bottom of the list. If the list contents can
be displayed within the limits of the list the scroll bar(s) will be greyed out.

To select an option from a scrollable list, click with the


left mouse button on the list to display the list items.

Moving the pointer up and down the list highlights each


list item in turn. To select a list item click the required
selection with the left mouse button.

Some scrollable lists allow only a single selection, so


that selecting any option deselects all others
automatically. Other lists allow multiple selections, with
all selected options highlighted simultaneously. To de-
select a highlighted option on a multi-item list, click on
it again. Repeated clicks toggle a selection on and off.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 34
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.6.6 Buttons

Buttons are raised areas of the form with a text label, either on the button or adjacent to it, that conveys the
purpose of the button. The button may either take direct action when activated or may display a further form.
Buttons are activated by moving the pointer over the button and clicking the left mouse button.

3.6.7 Link Labels

Link labels appear as text options on forms, when the cursor is positioned over them the
text is underlined, showing the user that it is available for use. Link labels that are
unavailable will be greyed out. When an available link label is selected the colour of the
text changes to red. The functions of the link label are very similar to that of a button,
either to take direct action or display a further form.

3.6.8 Fold Up Panels

Fold-up Panels are used to expand/contract the amount of visible data on a


form.

When a Fold-up Panel is hidden it displays a circle button with two „down‟
arrows on the right hand side of the panel header.

Clicking the button opens the panel to reveal the options contained within it.
These options may be any of the other gadgets.

Once unfolded the circle button on the panel header changes to show two
„up‟ arrows.

Clicking the button will fold-up the panel, hiding its contents.

3.6.9 Grids

Grid gadgets appear on forms where data is displayed in rows


and columns, similar to a spreadsheet. The grid gadget has the
capability of column grouping, column sorting and column
filtering; however, the functionality differs between forms that
contain these gadgets. The Drawlist shown is an example of a
Grid gadget

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 35
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.6.10 Form Menus

Some forms contain a menu bar across the top of the form. Form menus act in the same
way as the main menu bar, described previously, with the same options.

3.6.11 Actioning Form Inputs

Most forms include at least one control button which is used either to enter the command option represented
by the current form setting, to cancel any changes made to the form since initially opened, or to close the
form.

The OK and Apply buttons enter the current form settings as command inputs, OK also closes the form
whereas Apply leaves the form displayed for further input.

The Cancel and Reset buttons cancel any changes made to the settings of the form. Cancel also closes the
form. The Dismiss button simply closes the form.

Some forms contain more specific types of control buttons, which carry out particular command options
(extensions of the Apply concept); i.e. the Go to, Add and Remove buttons.

Where a form does not contain a Dismiss button a Control form menu item is usually provided. This pull-
down menu will contain a close option which dismisses the form.

Where neither a Dismiss button or Control pull-down menu are provided the form may be dismissed by
clicking the Close icon in the top right-hand side of the form with the left mouse button. This should only be
where no other option to dismiss the form is provided.

3.6.12 Alert Form

An Alert form is used to display information such as error messages, prompts and requests for confirmation
of changes. The form will usually have to be acknowledged before proceeding.

3.7 Accessing On-Line Help

Most bar menus have a Help option on their right-hand side. Where available, online help
gives detailed instructions on the use of the forms and menus via which the user controls
each application.

Selecting Help on the Main Menu displays the Help menu.

Pressing the F1 key at any time will display the help documentation.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 36
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.7.1 Contents

This option displays a list of all topics for which on–line help is available. This is effectively a Contents List
for the whole of the on–line help documentation, with search facilities incorporated.

3.7.2 Search

This displays the Help tri-pane window with the Search tab at the front so that the user can find all topics
which contain the specified keyword(s).

3.7.3 About

This displays information about the current operating system on the computer, the version of AVEVA Marine
and its applications.

3.8 Save Work

When the user makes changes to the Design database, i.e. by adding elements to the model, moving
elements, changing attributes or deleting elements, the changes must be saved. Work should be saved
regularly to avoid any loss of data due to unforeseen circumstances such as cut in the power supply to your
computer.

To save your work select Design > Save Work from the Main Menu or click the Save Work icon.

3.9 Get Work

During a users design work in AVEVA Marine, the data on which the user works is a copy of that stored in
the design databases. Design changes made by the user are shown immediately in the working copies and
may be stored permanently by updating the databases to save your work.

Design changes made by other users during your current AVEVA Marine session will not be shown in your
working copies unless the user updates these explicitly.

To do so, select Design > Get Work from the main menu or click the Get Work icon.

 All databases to which the user has Read access will be updated by the Get Work operation, whereas
the Save Work operation affects only those databases to which the user has Write access

3.10 Claim Lists

By selecting Utilities > Claimlists from the main menu bar, the Multiwrite Claim
List form is displayed. The user can only claim elements in a multiwrite database.

Claiming an element in a multiwrite database stops other users working on it. If the
database has a single user, then this user will be the only person who can write to it.
This form is used to control user claims. Multiwrite databases have a claim mode,
which is set when the database is created.

 Any items claimed by current user will be shown with bold font in Design Explorer

Explicit The user must claim an element before they can work on it.
Implicit An element which the user starts changing will be automatically claimed, but the
user can also choose to claim it explicitly before it is worked on, using the Claim
List form.
The user can only claim significant elements. i.e. in Outfitting the user can claim a whole BRAN, but the user
cannot claim Branch members individually or in Marine Draft the user can claim Sheets, or elements above
them in the hierarchy.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 37
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Claim list pull down has two options, Active Claimlist -
this is the user‟s claimlist. A list of all the significant elements
that the user has claimed will be displayed in the Elements list
and Others Claimlist - the Elements scrolling list will show all
claimed elements of all users in the current MDB except those
in the Active Claimlist. The user name is also shown in the
Elements list next to the element name or refno. An additional
option is added to this control for every individual user who has
a claimlist. i.e. USERA, USERB Claimlist etc.


Clicking on any element in the Elements list will navigate
to that element
The user must unclaim any elements which user has claimed before other users can access them. Other
users must do a Getwork before they can see any other user‟s changes. The user cannot unclaim an
element that another user has changed until the other user has done a Savework. Changing module or
leaving AVEVA Marine will unclaim all elements.

3.10.1 Control

Update Update the list. The list will be automatically updated each time it is opened,
and the Active Claimlist will be updated when the user claims elements using
the form. If elements are claimed by other methods, such as modifying, the
. displayed claim list can be updated using this Update option.
Close Closes the form.

3.10.2 Claim and Unclaim

CE Claims or unclaims the CE and all of the hierarchy below it.


CE Members Claims or unclaims the members of CE and all of their
hierarchy below, but not CE.
CE only Claims or unclaims CE only, not any hierarchy below it. This can be
used, i.e. if the user wants to change an attribute such as a
description which will not affect any elements below the current element.

CE Members only Claims or unclaims each member only and not the hierarchy below.
Pick Only active in Outfiting. Allows the user to claim or unclaim elements by graphical
. picking using event driven graphics.
List Claims or unclaims all elements in the selected lists. Lists are created using the
List form.
 Only elements belonging to the current writeable database can be Claimed and consequently
Unclaimed. Also, Unclaim is only active when there are elements in the Active Claimlist
In addition, the Unclaim option has the followings.

All Unclaims all elements in the form, the Active Claimlist and updates all the
claimlists.
Selected Unclaims all items selected in the Elements list.

3.10.3 Colour

Colour is only active in Outfitting.


Highlight Displays a colour selection form. When a colour is picked then all
the elements in the Elements list will be highlighted in that colour, in
all the graphical views. Only elements already in the Drawlist will be
highlighted; elements are not automatically added to the Drawlist.
Different colours can be used for each user claimlist.
Unhighlight Unhighlights the CE, all Elements in the selected claimlist or All
elements in the graphical views.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 38
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.10.4 Databases

Databases Allows the user to see all the claimed elements in the MDB, or
in the DB selected from the submenu.

3.11 Leaving AVEVA Marine (Exit)

To exit AVEVA Marine select Design > Exit from the Main Menu. If no changes have been made to the
Design databases the user will be prompted to confirm your selection with the following form.

Selecting Yes will exit AVEVA Marine and selecting No will abort the exit
command.

If changes have been made to the Design databases since your last save, selecting Design > Exit will
display the following form.

Selecting Yes will save the changes before exiting AVEVA Marine.
Selecting No will discard the changes before exiting AVEVA Marine
and selecting Cancel will abort the exit command.

3.12 Session Comments Form

Each time the user does a Save Work or module switch, a new session will be created for each of the
databases the user has modified. The session number, user name and current date are stored against each
session. The user can optionally add a session comment by selecting the Design > Session Comment
option from the main menu. The Session Comment form will be displayed.

Use the - and + buttons to move backwards and forwards through the sessions. Any comments added will
be displayed in the text pane. Current displays the details for the current session.

 On Session Numbering, for any database, Session 1 is when the database is created, and Session 2 is
when the World is created. This means that the first user session is Session 3

If the user selects Utilities > DB Listing or Query > DB Changes, the Database Listing form will be
displayed, which the user can use to compare current data with that at some previous session or date, and
query the session in which given attributes and elements were changed.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 39
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.13 Dockable Menus

The Graphical User Interface (GUI) allows the user to dock / undock and show and hide forms. By selecting
the Banner part of the form this allows the form to be dragged to a new location, as the form is dragged the
Positioning Docking Tool appears.

Dock upper
Dock left
portion
portion

Dock right
portion

Dock lower
portion Dock within
another form
Positioning Docking Tool

Select the banner for the form to be docked, the positioning docking tool appears, holding down the left
mouse button move the cursor over the positioning docking tool, as the cursor is moved over one of the
allowable positions, a preview is displayed within the graphical display area.

On the docked form banner, there is an Auto Hide icon, this allows the form to be automatically hidden when
not in use. The form will be reopened by moving the cursor over the hidden form tab.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 40
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

3.14 Command Window

The Command Window can be used to allow the user to type in commands instead of using the forms and
menus, select Display > Command Line to display the Command Window.

Type your command input in the Command Window text box form and press the return key to enter the
command. The scrollable list shows the commands entered and any resulting output from AVEVA Marine.

Clicking the right mouse button displays a pop-up menu, here the user can Copy, Paste, Paste as Macro,
Change the Font Size and also Clear the information within the Command Window.

The Macro files that are created can now just be dragged in to
the command window from their location even if there are
spaces in the path.

Also any line in the Command Window can be double clicked


to copy it as the active line.

Paste as Macro This allows the user to take a group of text that may have been written in note pad
and copied, then the text can be pasted into the Command Window as Paste as
Macro.

 The buffer size for the Command Window is 1000 lines


 It is also possible to input macro files by selecting Utilities > Import Macro

Exercise 1

Log into AVEVA Marine Outfitting and experiment with the pull down menus and the 3D graphical user
interface.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 41
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 42
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 4

4 Displaying Model Elements

4.1 Principles of the 3D Display

In order to view your design in the 3D View Window, there are three basic things to consider:

 Which elements are required to be viewed, i.e. building the Draw List.
 Scaling the required elements to fit the 3D View Window, i.e. setting the View Limits.
 Which direction are the elements to be viewed from, i.e. setting the View Direction.

AVEVA Marine uses a Draw List to hold the design elements to be displayed. All elements in the Draw List
must be in the Members List, however, not all elements in the Members List need to be in the Draw List.
Before any element can be displayed in the 3D View Window it must be added to the Draw List. This may
be a single equipment item, a number of items or a complete SITE. Elements can be „added‟ or „removed‟
from the Draw List at any time during a Design session.

4.2 Building the Draw List

4.2.1 Draw List

The Drawlist is displayed by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is over the Pick object to hide
icon and selecting Drawlist for the pop-up display.

As items are added or removed from the Graphical 3D


view the Drawlist is updated. The user can use the
Drawlist to change the colour of a design item or
remove it from the display.

 The Track changes checkbox must be checked to


automatically update the Drawlist contents.
(Default is checked)

The Draw List can be built in a number of ways:


www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 43
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

4.2.2 Using Drag and Drop

Design items can be dragged from the Design


Explorer into the 3D display using the Left Hand
Mouse button.

When the user drags the first item AVEVA Marine


will automatically scale the screen or in AVEVA
Marine terms “Set the View limits”.

The user can continue to add items but items that


are not within the current view limits will not be
displayed or maybe cropped. Setting limits is
discussed later.

 If a single primitive is required to be added


i.e. a reducer from a pipline then this can be
achieved by dragging the primitive from the
Design Explorer into the 3D graphical
display with the Ctrl key pressed.

4.2.3 From the Icon Menu

By selecting the item in the Design Explorer and then clicking the Add CE to Drawlist or Remove CE from
Drawlist will control whether the item is displayed or removed from the Graphical 3D view window.
Add CE to Drawlist

Remove CE from Drawlist


4.2.4 From the Design Explorer

Click any element in the Design Explorer Window with the right mouse button to display the Draw List sub-
menu. The 3D View item has a sub-menu which allows the user to Add, Remove, Highlight or Unhighlight
the CE
Add Adds the current element to the
Draw List.
Add Only enables a primitive to be added to
the 3D view without adding the
significant element
Add Connected Adds the current element plus any
connected elements to the Draw
List.
Add Within Volume Adds the current element to the
Draw List plus any elements that are
partially within the volume of the
current element.
Remove Elements may be removed from the
Draw List
Remove Only enables a primitive to be removed to
the 3D view without removing the
significant element
Highlight Used to highlight the CE, navigate
away from the item in order to see
the results.
Unhighlight Switch off item highlight.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 44
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

4.3 Setting the View Limits

In order to display items on the screen, whether it is a single item, a selection of items or an entire model,
the elements have to be scaled to fit the screen. Scaling of the items is performed automatically by AVEVA
Marine once the limits of the items to be displayed are known.

The limits of an item, or a selection of items, can be considered as a box completely encapsulating the item
or items to be viewed.

Limits of a single Equipment element Limits of several Equipment elements

4.3.1 Using the 3D View Controls

The buttons on the 3D View controls, located down the left side of the 3D View window, allow the user to
manipulate easily the contents of the view, without using the View pull-down menu or the 3D view shortcut
menu (obtained by clicking on the 3D View background with the right mouse button).

Limits CE & Options Sets the view limits to the currently selected element, which will fit
neatly into the view area. The button has its own shortcut menu
(obtained by clicking on the button with the right mouse button)
Obstruction Sets the view limits so that they include all elements in the current
Obstruction list (used for clash checking)
Clipbox Sets the limits box to have the same defining coordinates as the
current clip box.
Explicit Defines the view limits as the 3D co-ordinates of two diagonally
opposed corners of the limits box. The volume is defined by setting
3D co-ordinates for the opposing corners of a box that defines the
limits desired to display, using the From and To options on the
form list.
The Select form menu enables the user to select elements or their owner to define the limits:

CE set the limits to the current


element.
Owner sets the limits to the owner of
the current element.
Pick sets the limits to a selected
element.
Pick Owner sets the limits to the owner of
a selected element.

 Having made a selection the limit co-ordinates are displayed


on the form and may be adjusted manually.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 45
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Restore Lets the user restore the view to its previous setting without
having to remember the precise setting.
Look Explicit This allows the user to key in a Direction

Zoom to Selection Zoom in to fill the 3D View with the Graphical Selection, or the current
element if there is no selection. Alternatively, select Zoom To from the
shortcut menu on the currently selected element.

Walk to Draw List Zoom in to fill the 3D View with the currently displayed items (i.e. those
selected in the Draw List).

4.3.2 Using the View Menu

Selecting View from the Main Menu displays the View pull-down menu.

The majority of the View pull down menu items are covered in anther chapter of this
manual, however, the Zoom To and Walk To items concern the view limits. Both items
have sub-menus.

Selection Fills the 3D View Window with the current element or current
graphical selection, if one exists.
Identify Element Allows the user to graphically identify an element, by clicking on
it with the left mouse button, the element then fills the 3D View
Window with the identified element. Graphically identifying
an element in this context does not set the selected element to
be the current element.
Entire Draw List Fills the 3D View Window with all elements in the Draw List and
centres the view.

Walk To differs from Zoom To in that it sets the viewing limits, also Walk To removes items between your
eye position and the target item that are not in the immediate vicinity of the target item. Items in the
immediate vicinity of the target item will continue to be displayed, so it may be necessary to remove items
still obscuring the target item by removing them from the Draw List.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 46
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

4.3.3 Using the 3D View Shortcut Menu

Clicking the right mouse button with the pointer in the 3D View Window displays the 3D View Shortcut
Menu.

This menu is similar to the View menu on that Main Menu bar except that some menu
options are excluded.

The Zoom To and Walk To items have identical sub-menus to the View menu and operate
in the same way.

4.4 Setting the View Direction

The viewing direction can be set using the View menu on the Main Menu bar or from the 3D View Shortcut
Menu.

4.4.1 Using the View Menu

The following choices on the View menu concern setting the view direction.

Look displays a sub-menu with six viewing directions. Selecting a direction will set the view
direction to one selected.
Plan displays a sub-menu with four cardinal directions. Selecting a direction will set the view to a
plan view with the selected cardinal direction pointing up the screen.
Isometric displays a sub-menu containing four pre-set isometric view directions. Each direction
corresponds to Forward (X) pointing towards bottom left, bottom right, top right, and top left
of the screen.

Iso 1 Iso 2 Iso 3 Iso 4


www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 47
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

4.4.2 Using the 3D shortcut View Menu

Clicking the right mouse button with the pointer anywhere in the 3D View Window displays the 3D View
Shortcut Menu.

The Look, Plan and Isometric sub-menus are the same as those on the View menu and the options operate
in exactly the same way.

The current viewing direction is displayed in the Status Area of the 3D View.

Viewing Direction of Iso

Y45X-35Z means a viewing direction of Y 45 degrees X -35 degrees Z, which is the direction of an Iso 3
view.

A direction of Y-90Z is the default viewing direction and is the direction obtained when Plan > Y is selected
from the right mouse button menu or from the pull down menu.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 48
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 5

5 3D Views

AVEVA Marine provides the ability to view the model in multiple 3D Views, however, the number of views
will probably be limited by the physical size of the user‟s display.

5.1 Multiple 3D Views

Selecting Display > Graphical View from the Main Menu bar creates a new 3D View. The new view initially
fills the main AVEVA Marine window but may be modified in size and shape by dragging the view corners or
edges, as in standard Windows operations or by selecting Window > Cascade / Tile Horizontally etc.

Additional 3D Views may also be created and deleted by selecting Display > View Control from the Main
Menu bar and selecting the appropriate option from the form menu of the displayed 3D View Control form.

Each 3D View is numbered


in top bar of the window
and has a full set of the 3D
view manipulation icons on
the left-hand side of the
view.

All the 3D Views use the same Draw List, however, each view is independent in terms of view manipulation
and representation.

Only one 3D View can be active at any one time, the currently active view being the one whose top bar,
containing the view number, is highlighted. A view may be made current by clicking the top bar, clicking
anywhere in the view with the left mouse button, or by selecting Window > 3D View (x), where x is the view
number.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 49
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.2 Manipulating the View

The 3D view can be interactively manipulated using the mouse by Zooming, Panning and Rotating to
achieve the desired viewing direction. Each of the three modes uses the middle mouse button or scroll
wheel and may be accessed in a number of ways.

5.2.1 Using the View Menu

Selecting View > Middle Button Drag from the Main Menu displays
a sub-menu.

The desired mode may be selected from the sub-menu and a check
mark (tick) appears next to the selected mode the next time the sub-
menu is accessed.

5.2.2 Using the 3D View Shortcut Menu

Clicking in the 3D View with the right mouse button displays the 3D View
Shortcut Menu. Selecting Middle Button Drag displays the same sub-menu as
above.

5.2.3 Using the Keyboard Function Keys

Clicking the following function keys will activate the Zoom, Pan, Rotate and Walk etc. modes

F1 activates the help screen


F2 sets the Zoom mode
F3 sets the Pan mode
F4 switches between parallel and perspective views of the model
F5 sets the Rotate mode
F6 sets the Walk mode.
F7 determines whether the eye point rotates round the model or vice versa
F8 switches between a colour-shaded image and a wire line image
F9 switches the rotational slider controls on or off
F10 toggles between ENU & XYZ display modes

 Zoom Rectangle is not available on the function keys

5.2.4 Using the 3D View Controls

On the left-hand side of the 3D View there are the following icons. Clicking an icon will set the appropriate
mode. The „highlighted‟ icon depicts the current mode, for example Zoom Rectangle.

If a mode is set using any of the other methods described, the appropriate icon will appear „highlighted‟. All
modes are persistent, i.e. the mode will remain in operation until the user changes it. The current mode is
displayed in the Status Area in the bottom left corner of the 3D view.

Current Middle Mouse Button

Zoom Rectangle Sets the middle mouse button action to zoom rectangle on the 3D View
(Click and hold down the middle button to drag out a rectangle around the
items of interest. Releasing the mouse button will cause the selected
objects to fill the 3D View).

 The rectangle may be started from any corner


www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 50
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Zoom In / Out Sets the middle mouse button action to zoom 3D View in / out. (Click and
hold down the middle button and move it up and down the 3D View window.
Holding down the Ctrl key at the same time speeds up the zoom, or holding
down the shift key slows down the zoom)
In addition to the two middle mouse button zoom options described above,
zooming may be performed with the mouse scroll wheel. Rolling the scroll
wheel forward zooms in and rolling the scroll wheel backwards zooms out.

Zooming with the scroll wheel can be performed in any


of the middle mouse button drag modes.

Using a Click on the Middle mouse button will


centralise the view.

Rotate Sets the middle mouse button action to rotate. (Click and hold down the
middle button and move it from side to side in the 3D View window. Holding
down the Ctrl key at the same time speeds up the zoom, or holding down
the Shift key slows down the zoom)
Rotate mode enables the elements in the 3D view to be rotated around a
vertical or horizontal axis by clicking and holding down the middle mouse
button, anywhere in the 3D View, and move the pointer up and down or left
and right.
Moving the pointer left or right rotates the view around a vertical axis, whilst
moving the pointer up or down rotates the view around a horizontal axis.
The model may be rotated around the eye point, the position from which the
model is being viewed, or the eye may be rotated around the model.
The method of operation depends on the setting displayed in the Status
Area in the bottom left hand corner of the 3D View. If the status reads
Model the eye is rotated around the model. If the status reads Eye the
model will be rotated around the eye.

Selecting View > Settings > Eye will set Eye if the option is
currently unchecked, or set Model if the option is currently checked.

Function key F7 also toggles between Model and Eye. When the Model option is set the centre of rotation
is the centre of the 3D view.

 See Setting the View Centre, section 5.2.5 for other options that set the centre of rotation.

Rotating may also be performed using sliders along the bottom and right-hand edges of the 3D View.

The slider along the bottom of the view rotates the view around the vertical axis and the slider on the right-
hand side of the view rotates the view around the horizontal axis.

Clicking and holding down the left mouse button on the appropriate slider and moving the pointer in the
required direction will rotate the view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 51
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Selecting View > Settings > Borders will turn the sliders on if the option is currently unchecked and turn
them off if the option is currently checked also Function key F9 also toggles the sliders on and off.

Vertical Axis
Slider

Horizontal
Axis
Slider

Pan Sets the middle mouse button action to Pan. (Click and hold down the
middle button and move it in the 3D View window. Holding down the Ctrl
key at the same time speeds up the zoom, or holding down the shift key
slows down the zoom)
Pan mode enables the user to move across the 3D View in by clicking
and holding down the middle mouse button, anywhere in the 3D View
and moving the pointer in any direction.
The view will pan in the opposite direction to the pointer in direct correlation
to the amount the pointer is moved.
Panning may also be achieved by setting the Centre of Interest of the 3D
view. Positioning the pointer anywhere and in the 3D view and clicking the
middle mouse button will move the selected to the centre of the view, thus
effectively panning the view.
The view will pan by the distance between the picked point and the centre
of the view.
Keeping the pointer in the same location and repeatedly clicking the middle
mouse button will keep panning the view.

Walk In Walk mode the eye point moves towards or away from the model. When
in Walk mode, clicking and holding down the middle mouse button and
moving the pointer up walks the eye point forward, i.e. towards the model,
whilst moving the pointer down walks the eye point backwards, i.e. away
from the model.
Walk mode only works in perspective views. Selecting View > Settings >
Perspective will set Perspective if the option is currently unchecked or set
Model if the option is currently checked. Function key F4 also toggles
between Perspective and Parallel.
The current setting is displayed in the Status Area.

Perspective or Parallel
view

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 52
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.2.5 Setting the View Centre

Selecting any of the Walk To and Zoom To options, either from the View menu or 3D View Shortcut menu,
or clicking the Walk To Draw List and Zoom to Selection icons in the 3D View, will set the centre of the
view to the relevant selection.

The view centre may also be set on a selected element, a graphical selection or a screen pick by selecting
View > Set Centre of View from the Main Menu, or Set Centre of View from the 3D View Shortcut menu, to
display a sub-menu.

 Selection - This option centres the view on the current element


or the graphical selection, if one exits.
 Identify Element - This option enables the user to select an
element to centre the view on. Having selected the option, click
on any element in the 3D View with the left mouse button and
that element will be centred in the view. This option does not
make the selected element the current element.
 Screen Pick - This option enables the user to pick a point
anywhere in the 3D View with the left mouse button.The picked
point will become the centre of the view. When any method
described above is used to set the centre of the view, the centre
of rotation is also reset to the view centre.

5.2.6 Using the 3D View Controls

Left clicking on the Centre on Selection button , on the left side of a 3D view, sets the view centre to
the current Graphical Selection, if one exists, or the CE if not.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 53
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.3 View Representation

As well as providing functionality to manipulate the 3D view, AVEVA Marine provides tools that enable the
user to modify the view representation.

5.3.1 Using the 3D View Controls

The following options for modifying and managing the 3D View representation are available from the 3D
View Control buttons.

5.3.1.1 Clipping Options

Clipping lets the user display only those parts of the model which fall inside a clipping
box. The button has its own shortcut menu (obtained by clicking on the button with the
right mouse button). The options available from this menu are.

 Enable Controls whether the clipped model or the whole model is displayed. The default is for
clipping to be off.

 Capped - When it is used clipping, only the parts of the model which lie within the clipping box will
be displayed. Where items are intersected by the clipping box, they can have a coloured cap added
to show that they extend beyond the displayed region. Note that this feature is not available on all
graphics cards. To control whether or not caps are added, set Cap on or off. The default is for
capping to be off.

 Colour To change the colour used for capping The Clip Cap Colour form is displayed from which
the cap colour may be selected.

 CE - Sets the limits of the clipbox to the extents of the CE. The Clip CE button on the 3D View
performs the same function.
 Owner - Sets the clipping box to the extents of the owner of the CE.
 Limits Box Sets the clipbox limits to the dimensions of the explicitly defined Limits Box, if one
exists.
 Pick Item - Sets the clipping box to the element the user selects from the 3D View.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 54
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

 Pick Limit - Sets the extent of the clipping box to be defined by picking two opposing corners of a
box. The corner positions are defined by graphically picking on the 3D View. Positioning options are
controlled by the Positioning Control Toolbar..
 Explicit - selecting this option displays the Clipping Box form and activates the Positioning
Control Toolbar.

If a clipbox has previously been defined its dimensions and origin


are shown on the form, if not, a default sized box is placed at the
origin of the view.

The size of the clipbox may be specified by entering values in the


appropriate text boxes.

The position, i.e. the centre, of the clipbox may be specified by


entering co-ordinates in the relevant text boxes or by graphically
picking in the 3D View. Picking options are controlled by the
Positioning Control Toolbar.

The orientation of the clipbox may be specified by defining a plane


through which it passes using the two buttons at the top of the
Orientation section of the form or by editing the Y is and Z is text
boxes.

The extents of the clipbox may be modified by entering a +ve or –ve


value in the Extend clipped volume by text box.

Clicking the Apply button enables the defined clip box.

 Planes - as an alternative to the clipbox, up to six individual planes may be defined to clip the
model. The clipping planes feature and the clipbox are mutually exclusive, i.e. enabling one has the
effect of disabling the other and clearing any related forms and aid graphics. Clipping planes may be
at any angle, the direction of the plane considered to point into the area of interest.

Selecting Planes from the pull down menu displays the Clipping Planes
form. The Define clipping plane pull-down is used to select the plane (1-6)
to be defined.

Clicking the Pick button enables a clipping plane to be aligned with an item
when picked in the 3D View. The Position and Direction fields are
automatically filled in based on the position and orientation of the picked item.

Once the position and direction of the plane are defined it can be enabled by
clicking the Enable plane button. When selected the button is greyed out and
the Disable plane button becomes active. Thus the plane can be enabled or
disabled.

If any manual modifications are made to the Position or Direction settings the
Enable and Disable plane buttons are temporarily replaced by the Apply
changes and Discard changes buttons. Once one of these buttons is
selected the display reverts back to the Enable and Disable plane buttons.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 55
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

When a plane is defined a labelled graphics aid arrow is displayed at the origin
of the plane. The aid arrow is normal to the plane and points in the plane
direction.

The Reverse button will reverse the direction of the plane and update the
displayed aid arrow and Direction text box.

The location of the plane can be finely adjusted using the gadgets in the
Slide plane out or in area of the form.

The left and right arrow keys move the plane by increments of 50mm.

An explicit value may be entered in the text box. A +ve value will move the
plane in the direction of the aid arrow, i.e. in, and a –ve value will move the
plane in the opposite direction of the aid arrow, i.e. out.

Dragging the slider with the left mouse button moves the plane in the indicated direction, i.e. In or Out, by
the value displayed in the text box.

The Tools tab has the following options:

 Derive 6 planes from grid lines… - this option displays the Clip from Grid form that enables the clip
plane to be derived from grid lines.
From this form, the user can either explicitly define the clipping planes by entering a To and From
position using the default Ships Grid references, of by graphically picking the From and To positions,
using the Pick buttons.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 56
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

 Derive 6 planes from clip box… - this option uses the clipbox to define the six planes. For example,
Clip CE can be used, and then the six clip planes manually adjusted.
 Clear all clip planes… - this option displays a confirmation alert
form for removal of all clip plane data.

5.3.1.2 Clip CE

The Clip CE button sets the limits of the clipbox to the extents of the CE.

5.3.1.3 Pick Object to Hide

This allows the user to pick a single object to hide in the graphical view. If
the user clicks with the right mouse button a pull down menu is displayed.
The options available from this menu are.

 Show Last Hidden Object(s) - Unhides last hidden object(s).


 Show All Hidden Objects - Unhides all hidden objects without using a form.
 Show Hidden Objects - This displays the Hidden Objects form, by selecting one of the elements it
is then highlighted. Several objects can be highlighted in one operation by using the normal windows
method of holding the shift key down for multiple selection or the ctrl key for single selection, this
then activates the Show Objects button. Clicking the Show Objects button will re-display the
objects in the graphical view.

 New Local View of Selection - This creates a new view complete with its own drawlist.
 New Clone View - Makes a copy of the current view and current drawlist.
 Drawlist - This displays the draw list for the current view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 57
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

 Representation - This displays the Represent form, allowing the user


to control the representation of the elements inside the graphical view.

5.3.1.4 Apply Representation Rule Set

This button will apply any set Representation Rules to all the elements in the drawlist, without the need to
open the Representation Rules form.

 For details on Representation Rules, refer to section 5.8.4

5.3.1.5 World Axes

Clicking the World Axes button will display the view direction axes in the bottom left corner of the 3D View.
The view axes will change to reflect the 3D view direction, as the view direction is manipulated.

The axes can be displayed in X, Y and Z coordinates. The


coordinates can be set to E, N, U if required by changing the
session coordinates (Settings > Coordinates)

The axes cannot be moved in the 3D view, and will always be displayed the same size, irrespective of the
3D view scale.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 58
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.3.1.6 Restore View

Allows the user to restore up to four views. Clicking the left mouse button on one of these buttons restores
the view saved with that view number.

These saved views are only applicable to the current session, and will not be available after the user
has exited the system.

 A view must first be saved using the View > Save View submenu for these buttons to be active.
Refer to section 5.5.3

Restore View is also available from the main menu, in View > Restore View.
A sub-menu is displayed, allowing the user to select one of the four views to
be restored. If any of the Save View options have not been selected the
corresponding Restore View option will be greyed out.

5.4 Save & Restore View

AVEVA Marine provides the user with the ability to save and restore 3D views, via the
Save & Restore View utility. When a view is saved, the following view contents and settings are saved:

 The 3D View Drawlist.

 The 3D View environment, including the View settings (background colour, shaded etc), the view
Graphic Settings (holes drawn, Advanced Representation settings etc.) and the Drawlist graphical
settings (Edges, element translucency etc.).

5.4.1 The Save and Restore View form

The Save & Restore View form is accessed from the Save & Restore View icon on the 3D View Window
Manipulation Toolbar.

From the form, the user can name and save a view, and also has various options for recalling view contents
and/or settings.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 59
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.4.1.1 Save Name Textbox

The Save Name textbox is used for entering the desired name for
new view to be saved.

Also, previously saved views are selected using the pulldown


list on the Save Name textbox.

The form also includes a 3D preview panel, which


shows a preview of the selected saved view. When a
new View is saved, it will be displayed in the 3D
preview panel.

5.4.1.2 Save Current View

The Save Current View button allows the user to save the current 3D View contents and settings. If the
view is new, the new name must be entered into the Save Name textbox.

Saved views can also be overwritten, by selecting an existing saved view


from the pull-down list, and clicking the Save Current View button. A
confirmation form is displayed when a saved view is to be overwritten, or
if the entered name of a new saved view already exists.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 60
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.4.1.3 Restore Current View

The Restore Current View button allows the user to restore the contents and settings of a saved view into
the current 3D view. The current 3D view drawlist and view settings will be replaced by the selected saved
view.

5.4.1.4 Add To Drawlist

The Add To Drawlist button allows the user to add the contents of the drawlist of a saved view into the
drawlist of the current 3D view. The current 3D view graphical settings will not be changed.

5.4.1.5 Replace Drawlist

The Replace Drawlist button allows the user to replace the drawlist contents of the current 3D view with
that of a selected Saved View. The current 3D view graphical settings will not be changed, however any
Drawlist graphical settings for elements, such as colour and translucency, will be applied to the 3D view.

5.4.1.6 Delete Saved View

The Delete Saved View button will delete the saved view displayed in the Saved Name textbox, selected
from the pull-down menu.

5.4.1.7 Delete All Saved Views

The Delete All Saved Views button will delete all saved views from the pull-down list.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 61
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.4.2 Save & Restore View with Multiple 3D Views

The Restore Current View, Add To Drawlist and Replace Drawlist options of the Save & Restore View
form can be used when multiple 3D views are present in Design. When this is the case, the user is given the
option to update the Drawlist contents / 3D View settings of other 3D views.

5.4.3 Creating and Using a Saved View – Worked Example

In this worked example, a Saved View containing various elements will be created, and the view used,
demonstrating the different options on the Save & Restore View form.

5.4.3.1 Create a New Saved View

In the Design Explorer, navigate to ZONE 311-EQUI, and add to the 3D View.

On the 3D view, set the following:

Set the view background colour to white, using View >Settings > White Background.

Set the view direction to ISO3. The 3D view should look like this.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 62
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Open the Save & Restore View form. In the text box enter ZONE_311_Equipment and click the Save
Current View button. The 3D preview window in the form is updated to show the saved view.

Close the Save & Restore View form.

 The files containing the View settings will be


saved in the pdmsuser folder, using the 3D
view name.

5.4.3.2 Modify a Saved View

Open the Drawlist form using the icon on the 3D


View Window Manipulation Toolbar.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 63
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

From the Drawlist form, change the colour of EQUI SAS1001 to brightred, and set the translucency level to
70.

Dismiss the Drawlist form.

Now open the Save & Restore View form, and select the previously saved view from the pulldown list. Click
the Save View button. The Confirm checkbox will appear, click the Yes button. The 3D preview in the form
will update to include the representation changes applied to the equipment.

Dismiss the Save & Restore View form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 64
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.4.3.3 Using a Saved View

In the Command Window, type in REM ALL and hit the Return key. This command will clear the drawlist.

From the main menu, select Window > Close All Windows to close the
current 3D view.

From the main menu, select Display > Graphical View. An empty 3D view is now opened, with default
settings (black background, plan view direction).

5.4.3.4 Add to Drawlist

Add AREA 3M_PIPE to the 3D view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 65
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Open the Save & Restore View form. With the saved view ZONE_311_Equipment, click the Add to
Drawlist icon.

The drawlist members of the saved view are added to the 3D View. Note that the view direction, view
settings, etc. are unchanged, The Drawlist graphical settings of the 3D view, such as element colour and
translucency settings, are not applied.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 66
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.4.3.5 Replace Drawlist

Click the Replace Drawlist button on the


Save & Restore Views form.

The Drawlist of the current 3D View is deleted, and replaced with the Drawlist members from the selected
saved view (i.e. the Equipment only).

Using the Replace Drawlist option will also apply any drawlist
member graphical settings. EQUI SAS1001 is displayed with
the colour and translucency set previously. No saved view
settings, such as view direction, are applied to the 3D view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 67
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.4.3.6 Restore Current View

Click the Restore Current View button on


the Save & Restore Views form.

All settings from the saved view, such as background colour, view direction etc. will now be applied to the
3D View.

Dismiss the Save & Restore Views form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 68
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.4.4 Using a Saved View with Multiple 3D Views

Before using a saved view in multiple 3D views, the existing 3D contents should be cleared.

Clear the contents of the 3D view using the


Drawlist form. Highlight all the drawlist
members in the Drawlist form grid, and click
the Remove selection button.

Add ZONE_311_PIPE to the 3D view. Set the background colour to Black, and the view direction to Plan
(Y).

Open the Save & Restore View form. In the Save Name text box enter ZONE_311_Pipes and click the Save
button. A new Saved View is created.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 69
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

From the main menu, select Display > Graphical View. A new additional graphical
view is displayed.

Now select Window > Tile Vertically from the main menu to display the two views.
Both views will have the same Drawlist content. It may be necessary to click the Walk
to Drawlist icon in the new view to display the contents.

Click the Save & Restore View button in View


(2), to display the Save & Restore View form.
Select the saved view ZONE_311_Equipment,
and click the Restore Current View button.

The Confirm window is displayed, click No. View (2) will be updated
with the contents and view settings of the saved view, and View (1)
will remain unchanged.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 70
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

From the Save & Restore View form, still with saved view
ZONE_311_Equipment selected, click the Add to Drawlist button.

The Confirm window is displayed, click Yes. View (2) will be unchanged as the drawlist has not changed,
but now View (1) updated with the drawlist elements and drawlist graphical settings being added from the
saved view.

Close the Save & Restore View form, and re-open the form from the icon in View (1).

Click the Restore Current View button on the form, and the Confirm window is displayed. Click Yes to
restore this view settings and drawlist to all views. Now both views are restored with all the settings from the
saved view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 71
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.5 Advanced View Control

The Advanced View Control form allows users to:

 Specify a view Area Limits, either by using a Hull Block limits, or the limits of the Current Element
(CE).

 Modify the 3D view drawlist contents, by adding or removing selected Hull and Outfitting element
types.

 Show a Ship Reference Grid, together with frame rulers.

 Apply a clipping area to the view.

5.6 The Advanced View Control Form

The Advanced View Control form is accessed from the Save &
Restore View icon on the 3D View Window Manipulation Toolbar.

The form is split into three main areas:

 Area Limits – used to set the area limits of the 3D view.

 Drawlist – used to manage the view drawlist contents, by element type.

 Utilities – used to apply clipping planes to the view, and to define the plane positions.

These options are covered in the following sections.


www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 72
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.6.1 Area Limits

The Area Limits area of the form controls the limits used by the Drawlist management area. The area
extents are displayed as solid aid lines in the 3D View. The user can define the area from the limits in three
ways:

 Get Limits from CE – The limits are taken from the extents of a selected current element. The
current element can be an item, such as a Pipe or Equipment, but could also be an owning element
such as a Site or Zone, in which case the limits are set at the extents of all the owned elements.

 Get Limits from Hull Block – The limits are


taken from the extents of the Hull Block
selected from the pull-down menu. The pull-
down menu is populated with all the Hull Blocks
available in the MDB which contain elements.
Empty Hull Block elements are not included in
the list..

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 73
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

 Positions – the Positions area of the form, which is


collapsible, can be used to set the Area Limits
manually. Ship References or World Positions can be
used.

The values in the Positions area will update to reflect


the positions selected when using limits from a CE or
a Hull Block, and can be adjusted to suit.

If an out-of-range FR, LH or LV ship position value is


entered, the textbox background will turn orange.
Hovering the cursor over the textbox will display a
tooltip, which will advise the range of input values
acceptable for the project.

Clicking the From Position or To Position link label activates the Positioning Control toolbar, and allows
a user to graphically pick the From and To positions. The Lock checkboxes allow the user to lock the
current X, Y and Z values if required.

The Copy From Position link label will duplicate the From values
into the To fields, where they can be altered as required

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 74
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Right-mouse clicking in the Positions area of the form will display


the Format options available. The Positions on the form can be
displayed in Ship Grid references, X Y Z or E N U formats.

The Wholly Within and Wholly and Partially Within


radio buttons determine if elements which are either
wholly, or wholly and partially, within the Area Limits
set will be considered for the Drawlist management
functions.

5.6.2 Drawlist

Once the user has specified the required view Area Limits, then
elements can be added or removed as required, by element type.
This is achieved by using the options available in the Drawlist area
of the form.

The Hull Elements and Outfitting Elements areas consists of radio buttons and check boxes. These are
used to define which element types are to be added or removed using the Add Elements, Remove
Elements and Remove All Elements link labels.

The ALL and NONE radio buttons


set the element type checkboxes to
either all selected, or none selected.
The element type checkboxes are
greyed out, as they are not active
with the ALL or NONE radio buttons
selected.

The SELECTION checkbox will make the checkboxes active, and allow
the user to pick which element types are to be selected. In this example,
only HPANEL from the Hull Elements, and ELECT, EQUI and HVAC
elements will be considered from the Outfitting Elements.

 The ELECT option will include any CABLEWAY, CABLETRAY and


CABLE outfitting elements.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 75
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

With the required element types selected the link labels can
be used:

 Add Elements – This option will add all the elements of the selected types, within the defined Area.

 Remove Elements - This option will remove all the elements of the selected types, within the
defined Area Limits.

 Remove All Elements – This option will remove all the selected element types from the entire
Drawlist, irrespective of any Area Limit settings.

5.6.3 Utilities

The Utilities area of the form is used to define and apply a clipping area to the 3D view.

 The clipping area is toggled On and Off by using the Clipping Area : On / Off link label. The label
text changes to show the current status.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 76
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

 The slider bar area allows the clipping area planes to be changed, either by using the slider bars to
adjust the plane positions, or by entering an Offset value in the text box.

The six checkboxes allow the user to define which plane is to be moved, i.e. Aft or Fwd, Port or
Stbd, Up or Down. The selected plane to be moved is highlighted in the graphical view. The
Aft/Fwd, Stbd/Port and Down/Up checkboxes are mutually exclusive.

The Offset values entered will move the selected plane that value. +ve or –ve values will move the
plane in different directions. For example, a +ve entry in the Aft / Fwd Offset textbox will move that
plane Fwd, an –ve entry will move that plane Aft.

The slider bar will move the selected plane in increments of 100mm, up to a maximum of 2000mm in
either direction, in one operation. The Offset box will show the distance the plane has been moved
by the slider bar.

 The Show Clipping Planes checkbox will toggle the visibility of the clipping area in the 3D view.
Note this does not turn the clipping on or off.

When the form is closed, the Clipping Area is still active. When the form is reopened, the clipping plane
settings are remembered from the previous settings.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 77
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

 The ClipBox Initialize link label will set the clipbox area to match the Area
Limits setting of the form. If the clip limits have been changed, clicking this
link label will reset the clipping area.

When first initialised, the clipping planes are in the same position as the Area Limits box. However,
when the clipbox planes are moved, they can be seen in the 3D view as dashed aid lines.

5.6.4 Show Grid

Clicking the Show Grid checkbox will display a Ship Reference Grid, along with a
Frame ruler. The extents of the grid are defined by the Area Limits set.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 78
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.6.5 Advanced View Control – Worked Example

In this worked example, the various features of the Advanced View Control form will be demonstrated.

5.6.5.1 Setting the View Limits

Open the Advanced View Control form. In this example, the


Area Limits will be set as ZONE 311_EQUIP. Make Zone
311_EQUIP the CE, and click the Get Limits From CE link
label.

The Positions area will update to show the From and To


positions determined by the limits of ZONE 311_EQUI.

Check the Show Grid checkbox.

Ensure the clipping area is Off, and the Show Clipping Planes
checkbox is unchecked.

The graphical view will now appear as below, with the Area
Limits and Grid displayed.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 79
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.6.5.2 Adding Elements to the View

The next step is to add some elements into the 3D view, by element type, inside the set Area Limits.

Click the Wholly and Partially Within radio button.

In the Drawlist area of the form, set the Hull Elements radio button to NONE, and the Outfitting Elements
to SELECTION. Check all the element type checkboxes except ROOM (room design elements) and ELEC
(electrical elements).

Click the Add Elements link label. All the selected outfitting elements, either wholly or partially within the
limits of ZONE 311_EQUIP are added to the 3D view.

This function may take several seconds to execute. A progress bar is displayed at the bottom right of the
window.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 80
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Now, all Hull Elements wholly or partly within the area limits will be added to the 3D view.

In the Drawlist area of the form, set the Hull Elements radio button to ALL, and the Outfitting Elements to
NONE. Click the Add Elements link label. The hull panels are now also added to the 3D view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 81
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.6.5.3 Applying and Modifying a Clipping Area

The Clipping Area can now also be turned on. First, the user must click the Clipbox Initialize link label, to
update the Clipping area to reflect the set Area Limits, and then turn the clipping area On by click the
Clipping Area link label.

The 3D view is now clipped, with the Clipping Area the same as the Area Limits.

Now, the view needs to be clipped to show a slice between Frame 168 and Frame 175.

To set the longitudinal clipping area to the frames, the simplest way to achieve this is to set the Area Limits,
and initialize the clipbox to reflect the changes.

Modify the Positions area of the form as shown so the From


and To positions are from Frame 168 to Frame 175. Click the
Initialize Clipbox link label.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 82
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The 3D view is clipped


as shown.

Now the forward plane needs to be moved forward by 500mm to include the bulkhead at frame 175. This
can be achieved by using the slider bar for the plane.

Click the Show clipping planes checkbox. This will show the active clipping planes in the 3D view, and also
activate the slider bars. Click the Fwd checkbox, next to the Fwd/Aft slider bar. This plane position will be
changed by the slider bar, or by adding a value in the Offset textbox.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 83
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Left mouse click on the slider bar, holding down the mouse button. Drag the slider to the right (+ve)
direction. The slider moves in increments of 100mm, the value is shown in the Offset text box. Drag the
slider bar to 500mm. The upper clipping plane is moved forward 500mm.

 The same result could have been achieved by inputting 500 in the Offset textbox.

Save work.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 84
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.7 Other View Menu Options

Additional options to those described previously are available from the View menu from
the Main Menu.

5.7.1 Print Graphics

This option enables the user to output the contents of the active 3D View to a printer.
Selecting View > Print Graphics displays a standard Windows print form giving the
user the ability to select a printer, select the number of copies and set properties for the
print.

5.7.2 Copy Image

This option enables the user to copy the contents of the 3D View Window
to the Windows paste buffer so that it can be pasted into any Windows
application that supports picture objects.

Selecting View > Copy Image displays a sub-menu containing standard


image resolutions from 640x480 to 1600x1200.

5.7.3 Save View

This option enables the user to save the current state of a 3D View so that
the direction and magnification can be restored when required.

Selecting View > Save View > View 1 etc. allows the user to select up to
four views to be saved.

 If View 1 has already been saved, selecting it again will overwrite the
previous view and save the new one

These saved views are only applicable to the current session, and will not be available after the user has
exited the system.

 See section 5.3.1.6 for details on restoring these views.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 85
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.7.4 View Settings

Allows the user to set up the viewing options for the window. Function
key shortcuts are available, as indicated.

5.7.4.1 Shaded

Usually the model is viewed in solid shaded colour, however, in some circumstances it may be more
beneficial to work in wire-line mode.

Selecting View > Settings > Shaded will set shaded mode if the option is currently unchecked and set wire-
line mode if the option is currently checked. Solid shaded and wire-line modes may also be toggled by
selecting Settings > Graphics > View from the Main Menu bar to display the 3D View Options form and
checking or un-checking the Shaded checkbox.

Function key F8 also toggles between Shaded and Wire-line modes.

Equipment in Shaded mode Equipment in Wire-line mode

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 86
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.7.4.2 Background Colour

These options on the Settings sub-menu enable the user to select between a black or white background for
the currently active 3D View. Select View > Settings > Black Background / White Background

White can be the best choice of background colour if the view is to be printed or its contents copied to
another application.

5.7.4.3 High Quality

This option on the Settings sub-menu can be used to toggle between „high‟ and „standard‟ quality image(s)
of the Design module. Select View > Settings > High Quality

A high quality image will be slower to draw and manipulate than a standard quality one.

 This option does not affect the Arc Tolerance setting on the Graphical Settings form

5.7.4.4 Show Tooltips

This feature toggles a „Tooltip‟ function. If enabled, the name of the element under the mouse pointer will be
displayed in the Tooltip. Select View > Settings > Show Tooltips

5.7.4.5 Animations

This feature toggles smooth pan and zoom operations in 3D View when the Zoom To and Walk To options
are used. The Zoom operation is animated to show the transition from the original view definition to the final
view definition. This feature only operates if the system determines that the hardware is capable of
performing a smooth pan and zoom with the size of model displayed in the 3D View. Select View > Settings
> Animations

5.7.5 Translucency

Elements may also be displayed with a variable level of translucency.


From the Drawlist the visual properties of an element can be
displayed.

The visual properties shown are those of the element highlighted in


the Drawlist, which may not be the current element.

The available visual properties are Colour (covered in the next


section), Translucency and Edges.

The Translucency of the element / elements can be changed by sliding the pointer to the right to increase
the translucency.

Clicking the slider with the left mouse button and moving it along the scale sets the percentage of
translucency. The current setting is displayed to the left of the slider.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 87
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Click the Update Display button to view the changes in the graphical user interface (GUI)

Equipment with 40% translucency Edges off Equipment with 40% translucency Edges on

The Edges check box allows the user to select whether the edges of the selected object are displayed as
normal lines (Edges On) or ignored (Edges Off).

5.7.6 Colours

By default AVEVA Marine displays elements in the 3D View using default Autocolour rules which colour
elements depending on the element type.

 Modifying the Autocolour rules is covered in the AVEVA Marine Project Administration (Outfit) (TM-
2252) Training Guide

However, colours of individual elements, or groups of elements, may be changed using the following
methods.

5.7.6.1 From the Drawlist

Clicking on the Colour button in the Display Settings area of the Drawlist panel will displays a colour
palette.

 The CE colour and active colour take precedence over the


Drawlist display settings colour.

Clicking one of the colour buttons on the Colour form sets the colour property for the element or elements
highlighted in the Drawlist.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 88
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.7.6.2 From the Graphical Settings Form

 Refer to section 5.8.2 for details of this form.

5.7.6.3 From the Add to Drawlist Toolbar

The Add to Drawlist Toolbar controls the colour of elements added to the 3D view. By default, the Auto
button is active, so Auto Colour rules are applied to all elements added to the 3D view.

Clicking the Auto button on the Add to Drawlist Toolbar deactivates the Auto colour, and the Add to
Drawlist Colour button, Translucency pulldown and Edges button are activated. This allows the user to
choose the colour, translucency and edges setting for any new element added to the 3D view.

 The Translucency and Edges can also be controlled from this Add to Drawlist Toolbar

5.8 Graphical Settings Options

This form is used to configure the default display options for general 3D
graphics, colours, and the display representation of pipework, steelwork and P-
lines and P-Points. To activate the form select Settings > Graphics

5.8.1 3D Views

These options are used to configure the default options for new 3D Views and to change the options for any
views selected on the 3D View Control form. A title for a 3D View can also be set. The Load and Save
buttons load from and save to the options files stored in %PDMSUSER%.

 The settings made from this form apply to the next View to be
defined after the settings have been made. i.e. Display >
Graphical View

Title The title desired to give to the View. This will


appear in the 3D View Control form.
View Type Switches between parallel and perspective views of
the model.
Rotate Determines whether the eye point rotates round the
model or vice versa.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 89
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Shaded Gives a colour-shaded view if selected, wire line otherwise.

Borders Switches the rotational slider controls on or off.


Walkthrough Selects walkthrough mode, in which the eye point moves towards or away from the
model (only works in perspective views). In this mode, hold down the middle button
and move the mouse up to walk towards the model or down to walk away from the
model.
Background Colour Controls the colour of the View background. Click the coloured square to give the
3D View Background Colour form.

5.8.2 Colour

These options are used to set the defaults colours for the display of the current element, the active element
and other visible elements, and the colours used for aid lines and highlighting.

CE Shows the colour used for the current element.

 Some elements may not show up on the display when


they are the current element, as they have no physical
presence in the model i.e. gaskets

Active Shows the active colour; that is, the colour of the
current element.

 Only certain element types can be set to be active or


visible. These elements are known as significant
elements. They are generally elements one level up from
the components or primitives that represent, i.e.
Equipment, Branches, etc.

Visible Shows the visible colour; that is, the colour in which Drawlist elements other than the current
element will be displayed.

Aids Shows the colour used to display graphical aids; i.e., measuring lines.

Highlight Shows the colour used to highlight elements which have been picked for a
subsequent operation; i.e., for deletion or for adding to a list.
To change any of these colours;

Clicking any of the colour buttons displays a colour form appropriate


to the selection.

Selecting a colour button from the palette sets the colour for the
selected item.

Click Dismiss on the palette form to accept the change, and then
close the form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 90
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

 Element colours are set globally, i.e. for all views. The user can explicitly specify
colours for elements when they are added to the Draw List using the Graphical
Selection controls in the Drawlist form

The user can also select whether to use the Auto Colour rules on this form. These
rules are used to assign the colours to the significant elements when they are
added to the Draw List.

Auto Colour is selected by default, meaning that the default auto-colour rules are to be used.

Dynamic Auto If selected, then any change to a displayed element re-evaluates the colour rule for
Colour that element. i.e., if a currently displayed pipe has spec of "/A" and the
spec is changed to "/B", then the colour rules for "/B" will be immediately applied to
the pipe. If Dynamic Auto Colour is not selected, the colour rules will not be re-
evaluated until the pipe (or a new member of it) is added to the Draw List.

Auto Colour Views the Auto Colour Rules form, enabling users to set their own colour rules.
Rules

5.8.3 Representation

Additional representation properties, apart from colour and translucency previously described, of elements in
a 3D View, can be controlled using the Representation Tab. This changes the form to Representation
mode.

The user can display the 3D model in different representations;


i.e., pipework can be represented as centreline (single line) or
tube (double line).

The Representation form enables the user to set;

Tube and Centreline These options apply to piping components. If Tube is on, the components and
tubing are displayed as double line representation, i.e. colour shaded. If Centreline
is on, the components and tubing are displayed as single line representation.

Centreline representation Tube representation

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 91
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Holes Drawn This option determines how negative primitives, i.e. holes, cut-outs, etc., are
represented in the 3D View. If Holes Drawn is off, the negative primitives are shown
as black lines in a shaded view. If Holes Drawn is on, the negative primitives will be
shown cutting the appropriate model elements.
Holes Drawn is toggled on and off by checking and un-checking the Holes Drawn
checkbox.

Equipment with Holes Drawn set to off Equipment with Holes Drawn set to on

Insulation This option allows Insulation for piping components and tubing, as defined in the catalogue,
to be displayed.
Clicking the Insulation list and selecting a value turns the insulation representation on. A
percentage of translucency can be applied to the insulation representation by selecting an
appropriate value from the list.

Obstruction This option is similar to Insulation except that it controls the representation of Obstruction
volumes.
Obstruction volumes are used to represent areas in the model which must be kept clear of.
Obstructions could be walkways, escape routes, access volumes for valves and
instruments, etc.

Arc Tolerance This option sets the tolerance for the representation of arcs, i.e. the
„smoothness‟ of curved surfaces, will be represented.
The Arc Tolerance value is set by entering a number in the text box.
A value of 0.1 will give the „smoothest‟ arcs.

When the desired values have been set, click the Apply button and the 3D graphical view will modify the
representation.

Level The level Section of the Representation form enables different drawing levels to be set for
groups of elements.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 92
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

All elements used for shipbuilding items in the catalogue, i.e. piping components, structural
profiles, etc., or in Design, i.e. equipment, panels, etc., have a Level attribute. Different
representations of an item can be made and assigned to different levels such that modifying
the level displayed in the 3D View will change the representation of the item. i.e., a simple
representation of a pump may be constructed of primitives with a Level attribute set to a
range of 0 to 3, whilst a more detailed representation of the pump may be constructed of
primitives with a Level attribute set to a range of 4 to 10. Entering a value of 0 to 3,
inclusive, on the Representation form will display the simple representation of the pump,
whilst entering a value of 4 to 10, inclusive, will display the detailed representation.

The representation Level is set by entering a value in the appropriate text box.

Pipe is used for Piping and tubing / HVAC / and Cableway components
Nozzle is used for Equipment nozzles
Structure is used for Structural profiles and Room Design
Others is used for all other appropriate elements
Mass is used to determine the representation used when calculating mass
properties
Cable is used for Cable elements

 To ensure the correct TCTL (True Cut Length) value on SCTN elements with
negative geometry taken into account, the user must set the Mass representation level to 6 before
querying the True Cut Length, assuming level 6 is used to represent detail geometry in the structural
steel catalogue

5.8.4 Advanced Settings in Representation

Clicking the Advanced button on the Graphics Settings > Representation form will display the
Representation Rules form. From this form, the user can Create, Edit, Save and Load various
representation rules, to be applied to various element types.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 93
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

For example, the image below shows an area of the model, displayed with default representation.

Rules can be set in the Representation Rules form by changing the Representation Setting area of the
form to the desired settings, then either adding to the list by clicking the Add to End of List button, or
replacing a rule in the list by selecting the rule and clicking the Replace Selection button.
In this case the following rules are set:

 All EQUI elements with a function set to PUMP are displayed in Cyan.
 All pipes with a bore greater than 80mm are displayed Green, with insulation translucency set at
50%
 All pipes with a bore Equal to or Less Than 80mm are displayed in Magenta, with insulation
turned off.

 The expression to
check against a
particular system
is: (INSYSTEM[1]
eq /SWC) where
SWC is the
system
abbreviation.

The rules are applied to the graphical display by clicking the Apply button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 94
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The graphical display is updated to incorporate the rules set.

To restore the display to the default settings, click the Reset Display button

The Representation Rules Set can be saved by selecting File > Save from the Representation Rules form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 95
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Alternatively, previously created Rule Sets can be loaded into the form by selecting File > Load from the
Representation Rules form. Clicking Apply button on the Representation Rules form will apply the loaded
Rules Set to the 3D View.

If the 3D View has is changed, the Representation Rules can be applied to


the current drawlist without opening the Representation Rules form by
selecting the Apply Representation Rule Set icon on the 3D View
toolbar.

5.8.5 Steelwork

Sets the following types of representation on or off as required for the Outfitting structure.

Profile If selected, gives a full multi-line profile


representation, as defined in the catalogue.
Insulation If selected, insulation is shown on structural items,
as defined in the catalogue.
Obstruction From the list, select obstruction volume
representation to be Off, Solid or to have the
selected translucency value.

The Volume Options allow either Hull Design and Production


Design allow the user to specify whether a volumetric query will
return Hull Design data or Hull Production data.

The settings for Primary Nodes and Secondary Nodes are specified independently. If either or both types of
node are selected, they will be shown as crosses of the specified Size and Colour. Set these options as
required.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 96
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.8.6 Cabling

The Cabling tab on the Graphics Settings form allows the user to change various display settings for
Cabletray elements.

Cableway Branch Obstruction – this allows the user to display the obstruction volume set for the
cableway, at a desired translucency value.

The Centreline checkbox will display the centreline representation of the cableways.

 Note that to display the centrelines, Centreline


representation will need to have been set up in the
Cableway catalogue.

The Display checkboxes for Head & Tail attachments, Route Attachments and Route Nodes allow the
user to display or remove these elements from the 3D View.

Clicking the Colour buttons in these sections of the form will display a Colour form, where the displayed
colour of these elements can be set.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 97
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.8.7 Plines and P-Points

Sets the following types of representation on or off as required.

Plines if Display is selected, p-lines will be displayed


as arrows of the length specified from the
Length text box. Select the Pkey check box to
display Pkey numbers next to the arrows.

P-Points if Display is selected, P-Points will be


displayed as arrows of the length specified
from the Length check box. Select the
Numbers check box to display p-point
numbers next to the arrows.

5.9 AVEVA Marine Units

AVEVA Marine can deal with both metric and imperial units. By default, user input numbers are assumed to
be in metric units (millimetres), but the user can enter imperial units, or alternative Metric units simply by
changing the format of the input, i.e.

Input Meaning
2.5IN 2.5 inches
5.5FT 5.5 feet
2‟6.1/2 or 2ft6.1/2 2 feet 6.1/2 inches

2.3M 2.3 metres

For example, after entering a value in inches, hitting the Return key will convert the entered imperial value to
metric, the default metric distance units being mm.

By choosing the Settings > Units option, the following form will be displayed.
Select from the list the units required for distances, bores, masses etc..

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 98
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Once a unit has been selected, in this case the


Distance unit has been set to Metres, clicking
the Set Distance Unit button will set the session
distance units to Metres.

The default units displayed in forms can be set to


imperial if required, by entering UNITS FINCH
DIST in the Command Window. Opening the
Current Session Units form will display the
Distance options in imperial. Selecting the
desired format and clicking the Set Distance
Unit button will set this as the default. The
Example textbox shows an example the format
distances will be displayed in

Users can still enter distances in metric, as long as the units are included, i.e. 3500mm, 3.5m etc. But this
distance will now be converted and displayed in the chosen imperial format.

The session units set in the Current Session Units form can be saved as preferred user settings if
required. Clicking the Save button will save the settings, and these settings will be applied at the start of any
new session.

Clicking the Project Defaults button will apply the current projects default unit settings.

If the user needs to restore saved user unit settings, clicking the Restore button will apply the saved
settings.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 99
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.10 Measure Distance

The Measure Distance form is shown when the user clicks the Measure Distance icon from the Utilities
Toolbar or by selecting Query > Measure Distance from the main pull down menus.

or

The Position Control form and the Measure form both appear, the Position Control form allows the user
to select the positioning options as required before the user picks each point.

The Measure Distance form displays the results of the measure,


and also gives the user various options on how the measure
results are displayed, such as units, the dimensions shown
graphically, and the axes which are to be used for the U,V W
offset directions. These are explained in the following sections.

5.10.1 Units

The Units area of the form allows the user to set the measure result units.

The Unit Type pull-down allows the user to select which units the dimensions are to be displayed in.

 Default – This displays the dimensions in the project


default units.

 Metric – Displays the dimensions in Metric units

 Imperial – Displays the dimensions in Imperial units.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 100
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

When selecting either Metric or Imperial units, the Disply Unit pull-down menu is activated. This allows the
specific Metric or Imperial units for the dimensions to be selected, for example millimetres, centimetres or
metres for Metric.

Metric Display Units Imperial Display Units

5.10.2 Measure

The Measure area of the form gives the user options on how the dimensions are displayed and calculated.

5.10.2.1 Show Linear Dimension checkbox

The Show Linear Dimension checkbox allows the user to toggle the
visibility of the point-to-point linear dimension in the graphical display.
The U V W offset dimensions are always shown.

Show Linear Dimensions checked Show Linear Dimensions unchecked

The Distance and Offset values are always shown in the output area of
the form, and are not affected by the checkbox setting..

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 101
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.10.2.2 WRT Textbox

The wrt textbox allows the U V W offsets to be displayed with


respect to the local origin axes of a selected element. The wrt
textbox can be populated either by entering the name of the
element the local axes will be used from, or by navigating to
the element in the Design Explorer, entering CE into the box,
and clicking the return key. Note the default setting for this
textbox is World, which will give the U V W offsets in the World
X Y Z directions.

In the two examples shown below, the same two points have been picked for measuring, one with wrt World
and one wrt a rotated item of Equipment.

This example shows the U V W axes aligned with the X Y Z


World axes.

This example shows the U V W


axes aligned with the local axes of
the highlighted element.

Note the linear dimension directly


between the selected points is the
same in both examples; however
the U and V offset dimensions
have changed.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 102
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

5.10.2.3 Perpendicular To Checkbox

With the Perpendicular To checkbox checked, instead of displaying U V W offsets, the measure will display
the linear dimension (if the Show Linear Dimension checkbox is checked) and horizontal and vertical
dimensions between the picked points. The output area of the form displays the Distance, and Vertical and
Horizontal distances. Note that in Perpendicular To mode, the wrt textbox is unavailable.

When the second pick is a point, the distance is taken from point to point, as shown below.

Second Picked Point


First Picked Point

If the second picked element is a linear pick (line, edge etc) then the dimension is measured from the first
pick point, and projected to the second linear pick, normal to that pick. The dimension shown can be outside
the extents of the linear pick element, as shown in the example below.

Second Pick - Edge

First Picked Point

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 103
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

If the second picked element is a plane, then the dimension is measured from the first pick point, projected
normal to the picked plane. The dimension shown can be outside the extents of the planar element picked,
as shown in the example below.

Second Pick - Plane

First Picked Point

5.11 Measure Angle

The Measure Angle form is allows the user to determine the angle between three graphical point picks. The
Measure Angle form is displayed by either clicking the Measure Angle icon from the Utilities Toolbar or by
selecting Query > Measure Angle from the main pull down menus.

or

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 104
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Measure Angle form is displayed, the Positioning


Control Toolbar is activated. The angle to be measured is
defined by three pick points, starting with the route of the angle,
followed by the two points which create the angle being
measured, as shown in the simple example below. Points can
be defined using the pick options available in the Positioning
Control Toolbar.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 105
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The angle dimension is shown in the 3D view, and the angle and directions from the first (root) point picked
and the second and third points are also show. These directions are wrt World axes by default, however the
wrt textbox can be populated with the name of other elements, in which case the directions shown will be
with respect to the local axes of this element.

Exercise 2

Experiment with the windows manipulation toolbar, set up the graphical settings to your own personal
preference and make sure that the AVEVA Marine units are set to millimetres.

Experiment using the Measure Distance and Measure Angle functions, using elements in ZONE A01-
EQUIP.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 106
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 6

6 Attributes in AVEVA Marine

As discussed earlier, every element in an AVEVA Marine database has a fixed set of properties known as its
attributes. Some attributes are common throughout the range of elements while others differ according to
the type of element involved. i.e., a cylinder (CYLI) has Height and Diameter attributes whilst the size of a
box (BOX) is determined by Xlength, Ylength and Zlength attributes, as illustrated below.

(Up)
(Port) (Fwd)
(North) (East)

Diameter
Ylength

Zlength
Height

Xlength

When the user creates an element, a set of appropriate attributes are entered into the database. The
attributes will vary according to the type of element but essentially the process is the same. i.e., a cylinder
has the following attributes;

Attribute Default Value

Name Name if specified or hierarchy description


Type CYLI
Lock False (the element is not locked)
Owner The name of the owning element or its hierarchy description
Position N 0mm E 0mm U 0mm (relative to its owner)
Orientation Y is Y and Z is Z (relative to its owner)
Level 0 – 10 (this is a representation level setting)
Obstruction 2 (it is a solid hard element for clashing purposes)
Diameter Stated in mm
Height Stated in mm

These are all of the attributes of a cylinder, and all cylinders in the database will have precisely the same
number of attributes.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
107
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.1 Name

Every element in AVEVA Marine can be named. Whether named or not, every element will have a unique
system generated reference number. If a name is not specified, then a hierarchy description will be
displayed in the Design Explorer or Members List. Internally AVEVA Marine uses the reference number
since this cannot change. A table of names against reference numbers is maintained for this purpose.

All AVEVA Marine names begin with a forward slash character (/) and it is considered to be part of the
name. In order to save the user effort of typing this, all of the forms encountered will add the forward slash
for the user when clicking the Return or Enter key after typing a name. The forward slash character is not
shown in the Design Explorer or Members List.

The World has a special name in AVEVA Marine, /*

Names cannot contain spaces and are case sensitive. i.e., /YY9001A is a different name from /YY9001a or
/yy9001A. Elements in an AVEVA Marine database are unique, i.e. they cannot have the same name or
reference number.

6.2 Type

This attribute refers to the specific type of element it is, i.e. EQUI is an equipment type.

6.3 Lock

The Lock attribute determines if an element may be changed or not. If an element is locked, its Lock
attribute is set to the value True, preventing it from being modified until unlocked. By default, Lock is false.

 If an element is locked it will not be possible to delete the owner(s) of the element unless it is unlocked

6.4 Owner

The different levels in the hierarchy are maintained by an Owner-Member relationship. An EQUI will have
Zone as its owner, while a CYLI might well be one of the EQUI members. The owner is that element which is
directly related to the current element at the next level up in the hierarchy, as shown below.

owns

owns

owns

owns

The element on the upper level is the Owner of those elements directly below it, i.e. the equipment (EQUI)
owns the primitive (CYLI). The lower level elements are Members of the owning element, i.e. the EQUI is a
member of the Zone.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 108
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.5 Position

Diameter Many items in a database have a Position attribute which is


= = the position of the element in relation to its owner.
All primitives have a position attribute which relates to its
Point of Origin. As each primitive has a different Point of
Origin changing the position attribute will have the effect of
ll moving the cylinder to some other position with its Point of
Origin positioned on the new co-ordinates.
Height
ll

Point of
Origin

6.6 Orientation

By default, a cylinder is created in a vertical direction; that is, with one of its ends facing up. The orientation
attribute allows this to be changed to any angle on any axis.

6.7 Level

AVEVA Marine can produce different representations of an item, depending on how it has been modelled
and the representation levels used. The default level is 0 to 10 but levels can be set beyond this range if
needed. i.e., steelwork profiles can be represented by centreline (stick representation) only or by the full
detail of the section profile. By manipulating level settings it is, therefore, possible to have simple or complex
representation of elements for Design display or Draft drawings.

6.8 Obstruction

The Obstruction attribute is used to declare whether an element is solid or not. Obstructions can be
declared as Hard, Soft or No Obstruction, depending on the value of the Obstruction attribute. The default
value of 2 results in a Hard obstruction, 1 results in a Soft obstruction (used for walkways, maintenance
access etc.) and 0 is for No Obstruction (used to save computing time when elements are enclosed in
another element which acts as an overall obstruction).

All primitives in AVEVA Marine have an Obstruction attribute


which can be set to 0, 1 or 2. This is used by the clash-
checking utility, to determine the types of clash that the
element could be involved in. The three values have the
following meanings.

OBST = 0 Any clashes with this object will be ignored.


OBST = 1 The object is considered to be a soft
obstruction.
OBST = 2 The object is a hard obstruction, it is
solid element to be considered when
checking for clashes.

6.9 Height

The height of the cylinder.

6.10 Diameter

The diameter of the cylinder. www.aveva.com


© Copyright 1974 to current year. 109
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.11 UDA User Defined Attributes

This type of attribute is defined and assigned to elements using the


Lexicon module by the System or Project Administrator. A UDA is just
like any other attribute but may be specific to the company or the
particular project. The setting of the UDA is up to the user, although it
may have been set to a default value. Changing this is the same as
with all other attributes. Their current values may be found by querying
the items attributes. User Defined Attributes can be recognised by the
colon placed in front of it.

:CAPACITY (User Defined Attribute)


Spref (System Attribute)

6.12 The Attributes Form

The Attributes form allows the user to display and modify Attributes of elements. The form is opened by
either:

Selecting Display > Attributes from the main menu, or by right-mouse clicking on the element in the
Design Explorer, and selecting Attributes from the displayed menu.

or

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 110
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Attributes form displays the attributes of the Current


Element. The grid in the Attributes form can be
customised to display the Attributes in different ways, and
to filter the attributes shown. These options are available
from the right-mouse-click menu. Right mouse-clicking in
the grid column headers displays the following options:

6.12.1 WRT Element

The WRT Element option is used to specify where


the Position and Orientation Attributes of the
element are taken with respect to. The sub-menu
allows the user to pick the World, the element
Owner, and also any relevant hierarchical
elements.

The WRT Element chosen is displayed in any Position or Orientation attributes.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 111
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.12.2 Display Ppoints

The Display Ppoints option will display the Attributes of any Ppoints
owned by the element. If the element has no Ppoints, the Display
Points option is greyed out.

Elements which have Ppoints (such as


Primitives, pipe fittings etc.) will have the
Ppoints displayed in the grid. Expanding the
Ppoint in the grid displays the attributes for
that Ppoint.

6.12.3 Track CE

The Track CE option allows the Attributes grid to dynamically update to display
the attributes of the Current Element, as it is selected in the Design Explorer.

Clicking Track CE toggles this option on and off.

The Track CE checkbox in the form will have the same effect.

6.12.4 Categorised/Alphabetical

The Categorised/Alphabetical option will


change the grid display, grouping the
Attributes into categories.

The categories are expandable, displaying the Attributes


in that category.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 112
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.12.5 Expand Nodes and Collapse Nodes

The Expand Nodes and Collapse Nodes options are used when the grid is in
Categorised/Alphabetical mode. Expand Nodes will expand all the categories
in the grid, while Collapse Nodes will collapse all the categories, as shown in
the previous section.

6.12.6 Modify Category Filters

Clicking the Modify Category Filters option will display a form which allows
the user to select which categories are to be shown in the grid. The categories
are turned on and off using check boxes. This form can also be displayed by
clicking the Category Filters button on the Attributes form.

The Check all and Uncheck all link labels at the top of the form are used to
select or unselect all the categories.

or

The appearance of the Category Filters button changes when there are
attributes hidden from view in the form (unchecked).

Some Attributes Hidden No Hidden Attributes

 Filtering Categories is possible when the form is not in


Categorised/Alphabetical mode, if a category is not checked, any
attributes in this category will not be displayed in the grid.

6.12.7 Manage Category Filters

Clicking the Manage Category Filters option will display the Manage Filters by Element Type form. This
form will display filter settings, as defined by the Modify Category Filters, by Element type. For example, if an
Equipment (EQUI) element has had certain categories unselected, displaying the Attributes for any other
Equipment (EQUI) elements will have the same filtering applied. The filter can be deleted from the Manage
Filters by Element Type form by selecting the filter, and clicking the Delete Selected Filter(s) link label.
Once deleted, displaying the Attributes for EQUI elements will now display all the attributes.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 113
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.12.8 Display Standard Attributes

By clicking the Display UDAs option, the user can toggle the display of
Standard Attributes in the grid.

6.12.9 Display UDAs

By clicking the Display UDAs option, the user can toggle the display of UDAs
(User Defined Attributes) in the grid.

6.12.10 Display Pseudo Attributes

By clicking the Display Pseudo Attributes option, the user can toggle the
display of Pseudo Attributes in the grid.

6.12.11 Columns

The Columns option displays a sub-menu, which allows two


additional columns, the attribute Description and Data Type,
to be displayed in the grid. Clicking the Description and Data
Type options will toggle the display of these columns.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 114
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.12.12 Settings

The Settings option displays a sub-menu, which allows


the user toggle on or off any Unset or Nulref values for
Attributes in the grid. Instead of displaying Nulref or
unset, these fields will be displayed blank.

6.12.13 Export to Excel

Clicking the Export to Excel option allows the Attributes grid to be


exported to an Excel file. A Save As form is displayed, allowing the user
to give the Excel file a name and save it in the desired location.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 115
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.12.14 Print Preview

Clicking the Print Preview option will display a Print Preview form, which gives a preview of the Attributes
grid. From the Print Preview form, the user has the option to print the attributes.

6.13 Modifying Attributes

The attributes of the database elements can be modified


using the Attributes form. The attributes which are not
editable, for example the Type ad Owner attribute, or
attributes for elements the user does not have write
permission for, are displayed in the grid with a grey
background.

Left-mouse clicking an attribute value in the grid will allow the user to edit the value. Feedback is given to
the user on the success of the modified attribute.

Successful modifications are highlighted in Cyan. A tool tip


is displayed when the cursor is moved over the attribute
value, confirming the update is acceptable.

Unsuccessful modifications are highlighted in


Salmon. Again, a tooltip is displayed when the cursor
is moved over the attribute value, giving feedback on
the reason the update has failed..

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 116
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.14 Attribute Right-Mouse Options

When right-mouse clicking on an attribute in the


form, instead of from the column headers, there
are two additional options available, Navigate
To and Set Attribute Value to CE. These
options will be available or greyed out,
dependent upon if the attribute selected allows
modification, or has an external reference which
can be navigated to or set as.

6.14.1 Navigate To

The Navigate To option will navigate to the attribute setting, if it is referencing another element, and make
that element the CE.

 If the Track CE checkbox in Attributes form is checked, the form will display the attributes on the
element navigated to.

6.14.2 Set Attribute Value to CE

The Set Attribute Value to CE option allows the user to navigate to the element the selected attribute is to
be set to; selecting Set Attribute Value to CE will set the attribute. Note that the Track CE checkbox must
be unchecked to use this feature.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 117
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

6.15 AVEVA Marine Equipment Attributes

When the user creates elements, the attributes the user sets are usually
related to position, orientation and size. Taking Equipment as an
example, there are a number of other attributes relating to the
engineering data, which the user may wish to set. These include:

Function, User Wet Weight, User Dry Weight, User Wet C of G, Users
Dry C of G, Design code, Paint specification, Insulation code

 Below equipment level, all primitives have the two extra attributes
LEVEL and OBSTRUCTION. These relate to how AVEVA Marine
displays the primitives graphically

6.16 LEVEL Attributes

The LEVEL attribute defines the range of detailing levels at which the primitive is visible. i.e., if the user
builds an equipment item, the user can display the primitives in layers 1 - 3, the base in layers 5 - 7 and the
nozzles in layer 8 - 10. An example of how this works in Steelwork is that the user might draw the centreline
representation between, say, levels 0 and 5, and the full section between levels 6 and 10. The levels visible
in design determine the picture seen.

The current visible, levels are given by selecting the


Settings > Graphics menu and Representation tab.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 118
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 7

7 3D Aid Constructs and Working Planes

3D Aid Constructs are 2D graphics that can assist when creating complicated geometry, such as extrusions
and revolutions, in 3D model.

7.1 Creating 3D Aid Constructs

3D aid constructs are 2D graphics that can assist the user when creating complex geometry in your 3D
model. The constructs are not database elements and are, therefore, only displayed for the duration of the
Design session. However, the constructs may be saved to a file and restored during subsequent Design
sessions.

The different constructs may be used in conjunction with the Aid pick type on the Positioning Control
toolbar to give positional information. Constructs can be deleted, either individually or in their entirety, and
may also be modified once created.

The types of construct are Circle, Line, Working Point, Plane, and Grid

The colour of 3D Aid Constructs is controlled from the Colours


form, i.e. selecting Settings > Graphics > Colour from the
main menu and selecting the Aids colour.

7.2 3D Aid Construct Form

Selecting Utilities > Constructs from the main menu displays the 3D Aid Constructs form.

7.2.1 Control

The Control menu has the following options.

List Selecting the List option displays the Aid Constructors form. An explanation of this
form is given later in this session.
Save Selecting the Save option displays the File Browser form that enables the user to
save all of the constructs to a named file.
Load Selecting the Load option displays the File Browser form that enables the user to
restore the constructs from a saved file.
Close Selecting the Close option closes the 3D Aid Constructs form. www.aveva.com

© Copyright 1974 to current year.


119
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.2.2 Settings

The Settings menu has the following options.

Repeat If this setting is ON, indicated by a checkmark adjacent to


the menu label, the user can continue to create the
same type of construct until the user clicks the Esc key.
The option is toggled ON and OFF by alternate selections.

Size Selecting the Size option displays the Working Point Size form.

The size of working points can be specified by entering a value in the Diameter text box and the Apply to
radio buttons enable the user to apply this value to new working points or those already defined.

7.2.3 Create

All of the Create menu options have sub-menus that enable the user to select various
construction methods. At the top of each sub-menu, excluding Copy, is a Toolbar option which,
when selected, displays a toolbar form containing all the construction methods in the sub-
menu.

Copy The sub-menu options enable the user to Copy Offset, Copy Rotate and Copy Mirror any
aid construct type. For further details of these options see Copying and Modifying 3D
Aid Constructs.
Circle The sub-menu options enable the user to create circle constructs in different ways, see
Circle Constructs.
Line The sub-menu options enable the user to create line constructs in different ways, see Line
Constructs.
Work Point The sub-menu options enable the user to create working point constructs, see Working
Point Constructs.
Plane The sub-menu options enable the user to create plane constructs, see Plane Constructs.
Grids The sub-menu options enable the user to create different types of grid construct, see Grid
Constructs.

7.2.4 Modify

The Modify menu options enable the user to modify constructs once they are created and
are covered later in this manual; see Copying and Modifying 3D Aid Constructs.

7.2.5 Delete

The Delete menu has the following options;

Pick This option enables the user to pick a single construct to delete.

All Constructs This option deletes all constructs. The user


will be asked to confirm the decision with the
following confirmation form.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 120
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.2.6 Circle Constructs

Selecting Create > Circle > Toolbar from 3D Aid Constructs form displays the Circles form.

1. Through 3 points
2. Derive from a picked item
3. Fillet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4. Tangential to 3 lines
5. Fixed radius tangential to circle
6. Fixed radius, passing through 2 points
7. Tangential to a circle
8. Tangential to 2 circles
9. Derived diameter
10. Derived diameter on working plane
11. Fixed diameter
12. Fixed diameter on working plane
13. Derived radius
14. Derived radius on working plane
15. Fixed radius
16. Fixed radius on working plane
17. Define explicitly

Clicking any of the Circle construction method buttons displays relevant prompts in the Prompt Area of the
3D View. The construction methods work in conjunction with the Positioning Control toolbar enabling the
user to use model elements, displayed graphics, other 3D aid constructs, etc. in creating a Circle. Where a
Circle construction method requires a fixed diameter or radius an appropriate form is displayed when the
button is clicked.

The Measure button on these forms enables the user to set the diameter or radius by graphical picks;
alternatively, a value can be entered into the text box. Circle construction methods that work in conjunction
with a Working Plane require the working plane to be active; otherwise the following error message is
displayed.

Working Planes are explained later in this section.

The Define explicitly button displays the Modify Circle form, which enables the user to set the radius, start
and end angles, position and orientation of the circle.

 See Modifying 3D Aid Constructs for an explanation of this form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 121
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.2.7 Line Constructs

Selecting Create > Line>Toolbar from 3D Aid Constructs form displays the Lines form.
1. Between two points
2. Angled from copied
3. Derived from a picked item
4. Bisect the picked lines
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5. Point to circle tangent
6. Tangential to 2 circles
7. Define explicitly
Clicking any of the Line construction method buttons displays relevant prompts in the Prompt Area of the 3D
View. The construction methods work in conjunction with the Positioning Control toolbar enabling the user
to use model elements, displayed graphics, other 3D aid constructs, etc. in creating a Line.

The Define explicitly button displays the Modify Line form, which enables the user to set the position,
length and direction of the line. See Modifying 3D Aid Constructs for an explanation of this form.

7.2.8 Working Point Constructs

Selecting Create > Work Point > Toolbar from 3D Aid Constructs form displays the Points form.

1. Derive position
2. Define explicitly

1 2

The Derive position button works in conjunction with the Positioning Control toolbar enabling the user to
use model elements, displayed graphics, other 3D aid constructs, etc. in positioning a Working Point.

The Define explicitly button displays the Modify Work Point form and the Positioning Control toolbar
which enables the user to position the Working Point using explicit co-ordinates or graphical picks.

7.2.9 Plane Constructs

Selecting Create > Plane>Toolbar from 3D Aid Constructs form displays the Planes form.

1. Through 3 points
2. Define explicitly

1 2

The Through 3 points button works in conjunction with the Positioning Control toolbar enabling the user
to use model elements, displayed graphics, other 3D Aid constructs, etc. in defining a Plane construct. The
Define explicitly button displays the Modify Plane form and the Positioning Control toolbar which
enables the user to size, position and orientate the Plane.

The Modify Plane form is identical to the Working Plane form, see Creating Working Planes Explicitly for
an explanation

7.2.10 Grid Constructs

Selecting Create > Grids > Toolbar from 3D Aid Constructs form displays the Grids form.
1. Create linear grid
2. Create radial grid
3. Create plant grid
1 2 3
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 122
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.2.11 Linear Grid

A Linear grid is a „net‟ of lines with even spacing in the X direction and even spacing in the Y direction. The
X and Y spacing may be different, but they are consistent within one direction.

Selecting the Linear grid button from the Grids form displays the
Reference Linear Grid form.
The Options area of the form enables the user to;

 Label and Detail the grid with text aids by checking the
appropriate check box.

 Modify the Number of visible lines by entering a value in


the text box. The number of lines is equal in the X and Y
directions.

 Set the Spacing on the X and Y directions by entering a


value in the appropriate text box.

 See a Preview of the grid by clicking the Preview button.

 The Position area of the form enables the user to position


the grid origin, i.e. the centre of the grid, explicitly by
entering X/-X, Y/-Y and Z/-Z co-ordinates. As the
Positioning Control toolbar is also displayed when the
Reference Linear Grid form is opened, the grid origin
may be set by graphical picks.

 The Orientation area of the form enables the user to


orientate the grid in three ways.

Clicking the Through three points button prompts the user to graphically pick three points to define the
plane of the grid. When the orientation points have been picked, the Y is and Z is text boxes are updated
with new directions defined by the grid plane.

Clicking the Through origin and two points button prompts the user to graphically pick two points which,
together with the origin point, define the plane of the grid. When the orientation points have been picked, the
Y is and Z is text boxes are updated with new directions defined by the grid plane.

The orientation can also be set by entering a direction in the Y is and Z is text boxes. The X direction is
automatically derived, using the Left-hand Rule and is displayed beneath the two text boxes. It should be
noted that only one direction may be altered at a time so it may require two or more entries to re-orientate
the grid. If an invalid orientation is defined using this method the following error message is displayed.

 Orientating a grid does


not alter its position

The wrt text box enables the


position and orientation to be
set with respect to other
Design elements.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 123
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.2.12 Radial Grid

A Radial grid is a „spiders web‟ of radial lines and circles with user defined
angles and diameters.
Selecting the Radial grid button from the Grids form displays the
Reference Radial Grid form.

The Options area of the form enables the user to;


 Label and Detail the grid with text aids by checking the
appropriate check box.

 Set the Angles for the radial lines of the grid. If a value is
entered into the Angle Increment text box, a set of equally
spaced angles between 0° and 360°, using the entered value,
are displayed in the larger text box below. Alternatively, angles
may be entered individually in the larger text box.

 Set the Diameters for the circular lines of the grid. Values for the
Diameters are entered in the large text box below the Diameters
label. The values are absolute, i.e. they are measured from the
grid origin. If the values are entered out of numerical sequence
they will be automatically sorted and displayed if the Preview
button is clicked.

Radial Grid with equal angles

Radial Grid with unequal angles

See the Preview of the grid by clicking the Preview button.

The Position and Orientation areas of the form function in the same way as described for Linear grids.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 124
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.2.13 Plant Grid

A Plant Grid is similar to a Linear Grid except that the X spacing and Y spacing can vary. Selecting the Plant
Grid button from the Grids form displays the Reference Plant Grid form.

The Options area of the form enables the user to;


 Label and Detail the grid with text aids by checking the
appropriate check box.

 Specify the X and Y spacing for the grid lines. One grid line will
be created for each entry in the X Spacing and Y Spacing text
box. The spacing‟s are relative, i.e. they are measured from
the last grid line. Positive values will create lines in the
specified (X or Y) directions and negative values will create
lines in the opposite direction to that specified (–X or –Y).

Plant Grid with positive X and Y values

See the preview of the grid by clicking the Preview button.

The Position and Orientation areas of the form function in the same way as described for Linear grids.

7.3 User Grid System

Select Utilities > User Grid System, this displays the User Grid System form, this new form will allow the
user to select grid systems from the database for display in the graphical view.

This allows the user to create project wide and local


spatial grids in AVEVA Marine Outfitting. Grids are
related to Outfitting areas. Some will be project wide,
whilst others would be local to an area /
compartment, etc. Grids are particularly important
for the layout of structures and relating piping to
them, i.e. erection drawings and isometrics.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 125
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

If no Grid World (GRIDWL) exists, this could be created in the command window, by key in NEW GRIDWL
/MARINE-GRID-SYSTEM, this creates the new grid world in the design explorer.

7.3.1 3D Rectangular Grid

To create a 3D Plant Grid, select Create > 3D Rectangular Grid. The Reference 3D Rectangular Grid
form appears, key in the axis labels. The axis co-ordinates can be populated by clicking the Autofill button.

This displays the Autofill Rectangular Grid System form, key in the offsets and intervals for each axis and
then click the OK button. This populates the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid system. To display the grid in
the graphical display click the Preview button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Preview is displayed, key in the Name and then click the Save button.

There are various ways to display the grid, this is done by selecting
the radio buttons on the Display Grid System form.

Axis only Gridline IDs Spacings Coordinates

To manipulate the axes display, click the Select display axes button. The Plant Grid Axes form is
displayed, from the pull down menu select the Z axis offset required and then click the OK button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 127
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.3.2 3D Radial Grid

To create a 3D Radial Grid, select Create > 3D Radial Grid. The Reference 3D Radial Grid form appears,
key in the axis labels. The axis co-ordinates can be populated by clicking the Autofill button.

This displays the Autofill Radial Grid System form, key in the offsets and intervals for the Angles, Radii
and Z Axis and then click the OK button. This populates the Reference 3D Radial Grid system. To display
the grid in the graphical display click the Preview button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 128
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Preview is displayed, key in the Name and then click the Save button.

There are various ways to display the grid, this is done by selecting the
radio buttons on the Display Grid System form.

Axis only Gridline IDs Spacings Coordinates

To manipulate the axes display, click the Select display axes button. The Radial Grid Axes form is
displayed, from the pull down menu select the Z axis offset required and then click the OK button.

7.3.3 Display Grid Co-ordinates

The Co-ordinates can be displayed at any position for the new created grid system. Select Display > Picked
position in grid Coords, the system prompts for the user to pick position (Snap) snap. Holding down the left
mouse button move the cursor over the point to display its co-ordinates. The Display Grid Coords form is
displayed showing the co-ordinate position in World and the new co-ordinate system.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 129
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.4 Copying and Modifying 3D Aid Constructs

7.4.1 Copying 3D Aid Constructs

Selecting Create > Copy from the 3D Aid Constructs form


menu displays a sub-menu with three choices.

7.4.2 Offset

Selecting the Offset option displays the Aid Copy Offset form.

The Graphic Aids area of the form enables the user to select the select the
Aid(s) that desired to copy. Click the Pick button and then select the aid(s)
with the cursor, pressing the Esc key to end the selection. The number of aids
selected is displayed after the Selected: text. The Clear button, when active,
clears the selection.

Note that the Apply button is greyed out until the selection has been
completed.

Having selected the aids, the Copy Settings area of the form enables the user
to select whether to Copy or Move the selection (Move is covered later in this
section) as well as specifying the number of copies required.

The Offset Settings area of the form enables the user to select the Type of
offset required and then specify the appropriate Cardinal offsets or Distance
and Direction.

 If multiple copies have been specified then each aid is offset the specified amount from the previous
copy. Clicking the Apply button copies the selected aid(s) the specified number of times by the specified
offset(s)

7.4.3 Rotate

Selecting the Rotate option displays the Aid Copy Rotate form.

The Graphic Aid and Settings area of the form function as described for
Offset except that the Rotation Angle, in degrees, must also be specified. The
Rotation Axes area of the form enables the user to select or specify the
Position and Direction of the rotation axis. The area contains two buttons to
assist the user.
1. Pick Position of Rotation - clicking this button displays
the Positioning Control form and enables user to specify
the origin of the rotation axis using the form‟s options
1 2
2. Pick rotation line - clicking this button enables user to
select a 3D Aid whose position will be the origin of the
rotation axis
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 130
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The rotation axis origin may also be specified by manually entering appropriate co-ordinates in the text
boxes.

If it is used the Pick Position of Rotation button or specify the rotation axis origin manually, the direction of
the rotation axis may be specified in the Direction text box.

Using the Pick rotation line button sets the Direction to the direction of the selected 3D aid.

Whichever method it is used to specify the Position and Direction of the rotation axis, the values may be
edited manually at any time.

 If multiple copies have been specified then each aid is rotated the specified angle from the previous
copy. Clicking the Apply button copies the selected aid(s) the specified number of times by the
specified angle around the specified rotation axis

7.4.4 Mirror

Selecting the Mirror option displays the Aid Copy Mirror form.

The Graphic Aid and Settings area of the form function as described for
Offset except that the multiple copies cannot be specified.
The Mirror Plane area of the form enables the user to select or specify the
Position and Direction of the mirror plane. The area contains two buttons
to assist the user.
1. Pick position of mirror plane - clicking this button
displays the Positioning Control form and enables user to
1 2 specify the origin of the mirror plane using the form‟s
options.

2. Pick mirror plane - clicking this button enables user to


select a 3D Aid whose position will be the origin of the
mirror plane.
The mirror plane origin may also be specified by manually entering
appropriate co-ordinates in the text boxes.

If it is used the Pick position of mirror plane button or specify the rotation axis origin manually, the
direction of the mirror plane, i.e. the direction of the vector normal to the plane, may be specified in the
Direction text box.

Using the Pick mirror plane button sets the Direction to the direction of the selected 3D aid.
Whichever method it is used to specify the Position and Direction of the mirror plane, the values may be
edited manually at any time. A vector aid and representation of the plane are displayed using the specified
settings.

Clicking the Apply button copies and mirrors the selected aid(s) about the specified mirror plane.

7.5 Modifying 3D Aid Constructs

Selecting Modify from the 3D Aid Constructs form menu


displays the following menu.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 131
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.5.1 Move

The Move option displays a sub-menu with Offset, Rotate and Mirror options. These choices display the Aid
Move Offset, Aid Move Rotate and Aid Move Mirror forms respectively. The forms are identical in both
appearance and function to the respective Copy forms described previously except that Move is the default
in the Copy Settings area of the form and the copies text box is greyed out.

7.5.2 Cut

This option enables the user to Cut (delete) one selected aid.

7.5.3 Copy

This option copies a selected aid to the clipboard.

7.5.4 Paste

This option displays the Positioning Control toolbar and prompts the user to select a position to paste the
aid from the clipboard.

7.5.5 Toolbar

Clicking Toolbar displays the Modify toolbar.

1. Delete picked aid item – this option allows user to delete an aid

2. Reposition picked aid item – after picking the aid the Positioning Control
toolbar is displayed allowing you to reposition the aid origin using the form‟s
1 2 3 4
options

3. Redefine radius of picked circle – after selecting a circle aid the Positioning
Control toolbar is displayed allowing you to graphically change the circle radius.
Note that the circle origin does not change

4. Extend end of picked line – after selecting a line aid the Positioning Control
toolbar is displayed allowing you to specify a position through which the line will
be extended (or trimmed) using the form‟s options. Note that the direction of the
line does not change

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 132
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.5.6 Definition

This option allows the user to


modify an aid definition via a
form. After selecting this option
from the menu the user will be
prompted to select an aid to be
modified using the cursor. Once
the aid is selected an appropriate
form is displayed depending on
the type of aid that has been
selected. The form contains all
the data that defines that
particular aid type and it can be
modified by entering new values.

Examples of 3D Aid Modify forms

7.5.7 Position

This option prompts the user to select an aid to re-position. After selection the Positioning Control toolbar
is displayed and the aid origin can be graphically re-positioned using the form‟s options.
 Other data that defines the aid, i.e. radius, orientation, length, etc. is not modified. This option is the
same as Reposition picked aid item on the Modify menu

7.5.8 Radius

This option prompts the user to select a Circle aid. After selection the Positioning Control toolbar is
displayed and the radius can be changed by graphically picking a point using the form‟s options.
 Other data that defines the circle, i.e. position, orientation, etc. is not modified. This option is the same
as Redefine radius of picked circle on the Modify menu

7.5.9 Extend

This option prompts the user to select a Line aid. After selection the Positioning Control toolbar is
displayed and the length of the line may be changed by graphically selecting a point through which the end
of the line, nearest the selected point, will pass through.
 The orientation of the line is not modified. This option is the same as Extend end of picked line on the
Modify menu

7.5.10 Project onto a Plane

This option is greyed out unless there is an active Working Plane. If there is an active Working Plane this
option enables the user to project the aid onto the Working Plane and orientates the aid to the plane.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 133
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.6 Working Planes

A Working Plane, which may be a plane or a grid, can be used to control positioning operations. If a working
plane is active, picked positions will be projected onto the plane. If a grid is used as a working plane, picked
positions can be snapped to the intersections or cell centres of the grid.

The user can create a Working Plane explicitly, using the Utilities > Working Plane options from the main
menu, or the user can create a 3D Aid Plane or Grid, as described previously, and then make the aid the
active Working Plane.
 Only one Working Plane may be active at any given time

7.6.1 Creating Working Planes Explicitly

Selecting Utilities > Working Plane from the main menu displays the Working Plane form.

The Control form menu has only one option, Close, which enables the user to dismiss the form. The Define
form menu has the following options.

7.6.2 Pick

This option enables the user to pick an existing plane or grid to be the active working plane. Once selected,
the Active and Visible checkboxes are automatically checked and the selection becomes the active working
plane.

7.6.3 Reposition

This option displays the Positioning Control toolbar and enables the user to reposition the origin of the
active working plane by graphically selecting a point using the form‟s options.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 134
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

7.6.3.1 Plane

This option displays the Working Plane form.

The Options area of the form enables the user to Label the plane,
display the plane Axes and toggle between a Filled and unfilled
graphical representation of the plane, if it is displayed.

The Size area of the form enables the user to specify the size of the
graphical representation of the plane, when displayed. The size does
not affect the actual size of the plane, which is infinite, only the graphical
representation of it.

The Position & Orientation area of the form enable the user to position
the plane origin and orientate the plane as previously described for
Linear Grids.

Clicking the OK button on the form sets the defined plane as the active Working
Plane, automatically checking the Active and Visible checkboxes.

7.6.3.2 Linear Grid

This option displays the Working Plane – Linear Grid form. This form is identical in appearance and
functionality to the Reference Linear Grid form previously described.

Clicking the OK button on the form sets the defined grid as the active Working Plane, automatically checking
the Active and Visible checkboxes.

7.6.3.3 Radial Grid

This option displays the Working Plane –Radial Grid form. This form is identical in appearance and
functionality to the Reference Radial Grid form previously described.

Clicking the OK button on the form sets the defined grid as the active Working Plane, automatically checking
the Active and Visible checkboxes.

7.6.3.4 Plant Grid

This option displays the Working Plane – Plant Grid form. This form is identical in appearance and
functionality to the Reference Plant Grid form previously described.

Clicking the OK button on the form sets the defined grid as the active Working Plane, automatically checking
the Active and Visible checkboxes.

If a plane or grid is the active working plane, selecting Plane, Linear Grid, Radial Grid or Plant Grid from
the Working Plane form Define menu will display the appropriate form with all the data for the current
working plane element.

If a grid is the active working plane, the Working Grid snap area of the Working Plane form becomes active.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 135
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The options are;

On Picked position snaps to nearest grid intersection.


Off Grid behaves as a uniform working plane.
Centre Picked position snaps to nearest grid cell centre.

7.7 Worked Example (Creating 3D Aid Constructs)

In this worked example 3D Aid Constructs will be created, copied and modified.

Select Utilities > Constructs from the main menu to display the 3D Aid Constructs form. From the form
menu select Create > Grids > Toolbar to display the Grids form.

Click on the Create Linear Grid icon to display the Reference Linear Grid and the Positioning Control
toolbar. In the Spacing area of the Reference Linear Grid form enter 50 for the X and Y values. Enter a
value of 20 for the Number of visible lines, click the Preview button on the form and zoom in to the
displayed graphics.

Change your view direction to Iso 3

In the Orientation area of the form enter the following values in sequence. Z is X – press the Return key
and note the change in axis and aid direction. Y is Z – press the Return key and note the change in axis and
aid direction. Z is -Y – press the Return key and note the change in axis and aid direction.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 136
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Click the OK button again.

Select Create > Circle > Toolbar from the 3D Aid Constructs form menu to display the Circles form and
click the Fixed radius, passing through 2 points icon to display the Radius form, enter a value of 250 for
the radius.

Set the Positioning Control toolbar to Aid / Snap and click on the top horizontal grid line where it intersects
with the sixth vertical grid line, i.e. 250 from the top right hand corner of the grid, this is the first point in
defining the circle. Click on the same vertical grid line where it intersects with the centre horizontal grid line,
i.e. 10 spaces below the first point, a distance of 10 x 50mm = 500mm, this is the second point in defining
the circle.

There are two possible arcs that can be drawn with the specified radius between these two points. The user
is now prompted to select a Polar Control point, i.e. a point that will define where the arc will pass through.
Select an intersection of the right hand vertical grid line with any of the horizontal grid lines between the first
and second points selected.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 137
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Select Create > Line > Toolbar from the 3D Aid Constructs form menu to display the Lines form and click
the Between two points icon. Create three lines to form the shape shown in the right hand picture.

Click on the Point to circle tangent icon on the Lines form and create a line as shown.

7.8 Worked Example Continues (Modifying and Copying 3D Aid Constructs)

Select Modify > Position from the 3D Aid Constructs form and select the grid. Make sure the Positioning
Control toolbar is set to Aid / Snap and click on the top of the vertical Line aid indicated below. The grid
origin will reposition to the selected point.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 138
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Select Modify > Definition from the 3D Aid


Constructs form and select the grid again to
display the Modify Grid form. Set the Number
of visible lines to 22. In the Orientation area of
the form enter the following values in
sequence, Y is X – press the Return key. Z is Z
– press the Return key.

Click the OK button on the form to modify the grid construct.

Create Lines and a Circle to form a shape similar to the picture below,

Create the additional lines as shown below and then delete the grid and the larger circle using Delete > Pick
from the 3D Aid Constructs form menu. The aids should now look like this;

 To remove the aids from the graphical user interface


(GUI) open the Command Window and Key in AID
CLEAR ALL

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 139
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 140
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 8

8 Volumes

Volumes are 3D forms, which are modelled by the user to create a representation of an outfitting item. They
can be positioned directly in the ship model. They are modelled by combining a number of volume
primitives. Primitives are simple 3 dimensional forms created by providing a few simple parameters.
Combining them allows the user to create complex and realistic volumes easily and quickly.

To use Volumes the user must be in the General Application, to switch to the
General Application select Design > General

Once in the General Application, select Utilities > General, the User General
Utilities form appears. Under the Create menu the user has the possibility to
create Volume Model, SubVolume or Primitives. The Volume element must
belong to a Zone, the SubVolume element must belong to a Volume and the
Primitives can belong to a Volume or SubVolume element.

8.1 Creating a Volume

The Volume element (VOLM) must belong to a ZONE, so using the Design Explorer navigate to ZONE 311-
EQUI.

From the User General Utilities form select Create > Volume Model

The Volume Model form is displayed, Key in the Name PRELIM-TANK


and then click the OK button. The VOLM element is now displayed in the
Design Explorer window.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
141
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

8.2 Creating a SubVolume

The SubVolume element (SVOLM) must belong to a Volume element (VOLM), so using the Design Explorer
navigate to VOLM PRELIM-TANK. From the User General Utilities form select Create > SubVolume

The Sub Volume Model form is displayed, Key in the Name HATCH-1 and then click the OK button. The
SVOLM element is now displayed in the Design Explorer window.

8.3 Creating Primitives

Primitives can belong to a Volume (VOLM) or a SubVolume element (SVOLM), for the main body of the tank
this will belong to the Volume (VOLM) element. Using the Design Explorer navigate to the VOLM PRELIM-
TANK and then select Create > Primitives from the User General Utilities form. The Create Primitives
form is now displayed, select Cylinder

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 142
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Primitives form appears, if the Parameters button is clicked this displays the attribute that can be
applied to the primitive element i.e. Height and Diameter. To close the form select the X icon in the top right
hand corner of the form.

Key in the Height 3000 and the Diameter 1000 and click the Create button, the primitive form now expands
to display the Datum , Position, Rotate, and Align with P-Point functions and the cylinder is displayed in the
graphical display.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 143
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

8.3.1 Volume Representation using Levels

The Used for drop down is used to select pre-defined level settings i.e. for reserved space etc. The Levels
defines the range of detailing levels at which the primitive is visible. i.e., if the user builds a Volume, the user
can display the primitives in layers 1 - 3, the base in layers 5 - 7 and the nozzles in layer 8 - 10. The levels
visible in design determine the picture seen. The current visible levels are given by the Settings > Graphics
> Representation menu.

8.3.2 Datum

The Datum area allows the Datum point to move i.e. a cylinder has an
origin and six P-Points, this will allow the datum to be sited at any of these
points for ease of repositioning etc.

8.3.3 Position

The Position area allows each primitive to be positioned with respect to


(wrt) another element.

 It is often easier to create Volumes at 0, 0, 0 and then reposition


them later

8.3.4 Rotate

The cylinder requires rotating around its U axis by 90 degrees. In the Angle field key in 90, then from the
Direction pull down select About U and click the Apply Rotation button. This will form the main body of the
tank.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 144
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

8.3.5 Align with P-Point

The Align with P-Point allows the user to pick a P-Point on another element to align the current element
through.

8.4 Creating Primitives (Continued)

Click the Next button at the bottom of the form; this returns the user back to the Primitives form. Select Dish
from the options in the form. Key in the Diameter 1000, Radius 250, and the Height 250 and then click the
Create button.

In the Position area key in 1500 in a -Y direction, this moves the dish to
the end of the cylinder.

Now in the Rotate Area Key in the Angle 90 and from the Direction pull down select About U and then click
the Apply Rotation button until the dish is in the correct position. Repeat the Dish creation to for the
opposite end.

Now using the Design Explorer navigate now to the SVOLM HATCH-1 and create a cylinder to represent a
hatch.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 145
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

To create the second Hatch, copy the SVOLM HATCH-1 to create a second hatch.

From the Design Explorer Navigate to the newly created SVOLM Copy-of-HATCH-1 and click the right
mouse button and select Rename, key in the new name HATCH-2 and click the Apply button.

Reposition HATCH-2 using the Modify > Primitives from the User General Utilities form, once the primitive
has been repositioned click the Dismiss button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 146
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Position of the Volume Model can be modified by using the Model Editor or by keying in the new
position on the command line. For this example, navigate to VOLM PRELIM_TANK in the Design Explorer,
and key in Position X 122500mm Y 6000mm Z 7000mm on the command line.

Then add the following elements from Design Explorer to 3D View, and set the view direction to Iso2. The
preliminary tank volume is shown positioned.

 /F204-TD_1
 /F204-LB_1
 /F204-R_TB16_2

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 147
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 148
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 9

9 Equipment

Equipment items consist of a collection of AVEVA Marine primitives, arranged in such a way that they
physically model the real life object to some degree. When a user builds equipment, they need to decide
how to model the object, just as if the user was building a plastic model. The only difference in AVEVA
Marine terms is that the object is modelled at full size rather than working to a scale.

9.1 Equipment Application

To start the equipment application, select Design > Equipment. This sets the
menus for the equipment application.

9.2 Design Explorer

From the Design Explorer window the equipment is broken down into a tree structure, starting with
equipment, nozzles and then sub-equipment.

9.3 Toolbars

9.3.1 Equipment Toolbars

1. Create Standard Equipment


2. Modify Properties
3. Modify Position
1 2 3 4 5 4. Modify Orientation
5. Navigation Level

 The arrow can be used to navigate to different levels of the


equipment i.e. Equipment, Sub Equipment or Element

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
149
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.4 Primitives

In order to build an equipment item, it is first needed to be decided what types of primitives to use. As an
example, the simple storage vessel shown below could be constructed from a cylinder for the main body,
two dishes for the ends, two boxes for the support legs and a nozzle for the piping connection.

2 x Dishes

1 x Cylinder

Equipment
Origin
2 x Boxes

1 x Nozzle

All of these „building blocks‟ are selected from the list of available AVEVA Marine primitives. These are
described in detail in Appendix A.

9.5 AVEVA Marine Names

Any element in the AVEVA Marine database may be named. Names enable the user to identify elements
and to produce meaningful reports from the database. Which elements the user attaches names to, is a
matter of choice, but in general the user would be expected to name all major design items such as
Equipment, Nozzles, Pipes and Valves.

Conventionally, for equipment, the user would probably name the main equipment and all of its nozzles.
Nozzles usually carry the equipment name plus a suffix to identify the specific nozzle. i.e. nozzle 1 of an
equipment called /YY9001 would probably be called /YY9001-N1, /YY9001/N1 or simply /YY9001/1.
Whatever names applied, the name convention is usually defined in the project specification used for the
project the user is working on. It is probable that the project will have Autonaming rules set up for items such
as nozzles so that the project conventions are followed in every instance.

Attaching names to elements may be done in a number of ways. If the user is using the AVEVA Marine
applications menus, most creation forms offer an opportunity to name the element being created. If the user
forgets to name an element, or wants to change an element name, select Modify > Name from the main
menu to display the Name form shown below.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 150
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Key in the new required name, select the option to Re-name all, this will
rename the equipment, nozzles and sub equipment identifiers to the same
name as the equipment, then click Apply

All of the application forms allow the user to input a name without the preceding slash (/) character. This is
because the system adds this automatically during the command processing.

 Names cannot contain spaces and are case sensitive. i.e., /YY9001A is a different name from
/YY9001a or /yy9001A. Elements in an AVEVA Marine database are unique, i.e. they cannot have the
same name or reference number

9.6 SITE and ZONE

Before any Equipment, Pipes, Ventilation, etc can be created, a SITE and a ZONE need to be created.
These two elements are a way of grouping items in specific areas to allow greater control of the model.

A SITE is owned by the WORLD and the ZONE is owned by the SITE.
Consider SITE EQUIP_4DK_FWD. This is the site for all Equipment, at 3
deck level, in the forward section of the ship. This SITE can then hold a
number of ZONE elements; these could be the compartments within the
Site. For example ZONE 409_EQUIP holds all the Equipment in
compartment 409..

9.6.1 Creating a SITE

Using the Design Explorer window navigate to the WORL level, now select Create > Site from the main pull
down menus, the Create Site form appears,

Key in the Name /NEW_EQUI_3DK_FWD, the user could also set the Purpose attribute of the Site from the
drop down menu if required..
Click OK, and the SITE is created.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 151
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.6.2 Creating a ZONE

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the newly created SITE level, now select Create > Zone from the
main pull down menus, the Create Zone form appears.

Key in the Name 311_NEW_EQUIP, the user could also select a Purpose from the drop down menu.
And then click OK. The ZONE is created.

 Remember to create any element, the user needs to be positioned at the correct level in the hierarchy,
so before a Zone can be created, the user must be positioned at a Site in the Design Explorer.

9.7 Creating a Group

Select Create > Group from the main pull down menus, the Groups form appears. Using the tree view, right
click on any item to create a group world beneath Design WORL* and select the Create Group world or
select the Create pull down menu and select Group world.

The Create Group World form appears, key in the Name /Compartment_311 and the Description
Elements in Compartment 311 then click OK. The GPWL (Group World) for the Compartment 311 is
created.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 152
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Under a group world the user can create group sets, from the context menu, right click the group world
created previously and select Create Group Sets. The Create Group form appears, key in the Name
/OUTFIT and the Description Compartment 311 Outfit then click OK. The GPSET (Group Set) for the Aft
pump room is created.

The
use
r
can now Add elements to the created Group set, select the Group Set
and click the right mouse button to display the pop-up, this pop up
allows the user to:-

 Add Current Element


 Add Current Element Members
 Remove Current Element
 Remove Current Element Members
 Add From Current List
 Remove From Current List.

In this case, ZONE 311-PIPE has been made the CE, and Add Current Element Members has been
selected. Other Outfitting elements in Compartment 311, such as cabletray, could also be added to this
Group Set if required.

All the Pipes owned by ZONE 311-PIPE have been added to the Group Set. The group can now be seen to
be populated in the Design Explorer; this can be used to drag a group into the 3D view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 153
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.7.1 Virtual Hierarchies

A Virtual Hierarchy is another method of adding elements to a Group Set. It allows an expression to be used
which will dynamically add specified elements to the Group Set. Any new elements created later which fall
inside the specified expression will be automatically added to the Group Set.

The dynamic selection consists of a PML 1 collection expression, and is set against the SCOSEL (Access
Control Scope) attribute of the Group Set (GPSET) element.

Some examples of expressions which can be used are:

 ALL PIPE WHERE ( BORE GT 80 ) - This will add all PIPE elements in the MDB which have a
Bore greater than 80
 ALL EQUI WHERE ( PURPOSE EQ „PUMP‟ ) FOR SITE /EQUIP_3DK_FWD . This will add all
Equipment elements, located beneath SITE EQUIP_3DK_FWD
 ALL ( EQUI HVAC ) - This will add all EQUI and HVAC elements in the MDB

In this instance, the SCOSEL attribute of the Group Set created previously can be updated to dynamically
add all EQUI elements belonging to ZONE 311-EQUIP. From the Attributes form, change the SCOSEL
attribute to ALL (EQUI) FOR ZONE /311-EQUIP.

The Group Set now contains all the EQUI elements owned by ZONE 311-EQUIP, and any subsequent EQUI
elements added to this Zone will automatically be added to the Group Set.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 154
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.8 Equipment

To create Equipment elements the user can either use the Equipment applications or commands at the
command line. Creating elements using the equipment applications can be done in two main ways:-
 Creating Equipment – the user can select the Create > Equipment menu to create an empty
Equipment element, were the user adds different primitives to build up the graphical representation
for the Equipment item.
 Creating Standard Equipment - by selecting the Create > Standard option on the menu bar, this
takes the user through a series of steps allowing the user to build up parameterised equipment
based on a specification of standard equipment types.

or

9.8.1 Creating an Equipment Element

Using the Design Explorer navigate to ZONE 311_NEW_EQUI created


earlier, which will hold the equipment. Select Create > Equipment from the
main pull down menus, the Equipment Creation form appears.

Key in the Name /PRIMITIVE_EXAMPLES.

The user also has the option to define the position of the Equipment,
either using Ship Position, or by defining an X, Y, Z position WRT
another element, by clicking the Position button to toggle the form
between Ship Position and Position mode.

 It is often easier to create Equipment at 0, 0, 0, and then position


the completed Equipment at the desired location on the ship.

The user also has the option to set some Attributes for Equipment,
including Description and Function.

Leave the Position of the Equipment at 0, 0, 0, and leave the


Attributes values blank, then click OK. The Equipment is created

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 155
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.9 The Axis System (Ships coordinate System)

X = Forward or East
-X = Aft or West
Y = Port or North
-Y = Starboard or South
Z = Up
-Z = Down
After deciding how to represent an equipment item with the appropriate primitives, the user needs to
consider both the orientation of the equipment itself and that of its primitives. AVEVA Marine models are
built in a 3D world, which allows the user to position and orientate any element. The axis system used in the
3D world relates to either the ships co-ordinate system as the user would expect in ship design or compass
directions. As well as using positions such as „Frame 51 + 500 Lg (Horz) 7 + 250, Lg (Vert) 21 – 80‟ the user
can also use absolute coordinates for X, Y, and Z.

The AVEVA Plant axis system could also be used i.e. „NORTH4500 EAST3000 UP8000. The user can also
use orientations like „NORTH 45 EAST‟ or „UP 45 SOUTH 15 DOWN‟. In AVEVA Marine, the user needs
only give the first letter of these directions, i.e. N, S, E, W, U, D or X, -X, Y, -Y, Z, -Z, and the user does not
usually need spaces between the different co-ordinate directions; thus N37.5 E27.3 U is a valid direction.

9.9.1 Equipment and Primitive Orientation

Primitives like boxes should be built such that their X, Y and Z lengths are aligned with the default axis
system not built in such a way that they need to be rotated from the default axis system. Obviously, some
primitives will need to be rotated, but if the user tries to keep these to a minimum then any subsequent
changes to the equipment will be easier.

9.10 Creating Primitives

The Create Primitives form is opened by selecting Create > Primitives from the main menu.
The methods for creating, positioning and rotating Primitives for Equipment are the same as previously
described for Volumes.

The following sections will demonstrate the creation of some other types of primitive.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 156
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.10.1 Creating an Extrusion

The Extrusion option allows the user to create a set of extrusion vertices in various ways, depending on the
requirements of the design and personal preferences. It also allows the user to set the other attributes
necessary to relate these vertices to a 3D extrusion representation.

The shape of an extrusion (EXTR) is defined by a loop (LOOP). The 2D geometry of the loop is defined by
linking a set of vertices (VERTs), each with a position in the loop‟s XY coordinate system. The Height
(HEIG) attribute of the LOOP defines the distance by which the 2D shape is extruded (in the Z direction) to
form the 3D extrusion volume.

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the equipment element and select Create > Primitives from the
main pull down menu. The Primitives form is displayed; select the primitive required from the available
menu. i.e. Extrusion.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 157
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

In the Create Extrusion form key in the Thickness of the extrusion


and then select one of the Create Methods.

The user can specify the position of a new positive or negative


extrusion vertex (VERT) in a variety of ways. Click on the icon
which corresponds to the method the user wants to use for the
next point.

The following Create Methods are available:-


1. Pick a point graphically using any of the standard cursor picking methods
2. Create a point by entering its explicit coordinates
3. Specify a distance and direction which define a point relative to the position of
1 2 3 4 5 6 the preceding vertex
4. Construct a fillet arc with a specified radius between two picked tangent lines
5. Construct a fillet arc passing through three picked points
6. Construct a fillet arc with a specified radius, passing through two picked points,
which curves towards a picked direction

In this example the extrusion will be created by entering explicit coordinates. Click the Explicitly Defined
Position button, the Define Vertex form appears, click the Apply button and this will create the first vertex
point. Create the additional vertices using the positions shown.

The Extrusion Vertexes have an attribute Fradius. If this attribute is changed to 300mm for vertex 2 and 3
then this will modify the extrusion as shown.

 Fradius is an attribute that can also can be changed via selecting Modify > Primitives and giving any
value to Radius field for appropriate vertices and clicking Modify button

Remove the created extrusion from the 3D view. www.aveva.com


© Copyright 1974 to current year. 158
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.10.2 Creating a Revolution

This lets the user create a positive or negative volume by rotating a user-defined loop (a 2D profile) through
a specified angle around a given axis. The Axes controls let a user define the axis about which the loop will
be rotated, and the plane in which the loop is defined (the start of the generated shape).
 When the user displays the form, it will automatically be in event-driven graphics mode ready to pick a
line defining the axis

The line defining the axis of rotation will be created using an aid. From the main menu pull down select
Utilities > Constructs, the 3D Aid Constructs form appears, now select Create > Line > Explicit

The Modify Line form appears, and also in the graphical view a line is shown, select the position of the line
and the length. This is the start position which we will use as the rotational axis. Click OK to confirm the lines
position and length.

Now using the Design Explorer navigate to the equipment element and select Create > Primitives from the
main pull down menu. The Create Primitives form appears, select the primitive required from the available
menu. i.e. Solid of Revolution.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 159
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The +ve Revolution form is displayed. In the Settings area, enter the Angle
through which the loop is to be rotated to 90 degrees. The user can either type the
angle in explicitly, or use the right button mouse menu to derive the angle by
picking existing design items. From the Axes section click the Rotation Line
button, in the prompt area of the screen a message tells the user to „Pick line to
rotate about’. Select the line previously created to be the axis of rotation.

Now on the +ve Revolution form the Point on Plane button is active, select the Point on Plane button and
then choose from the Positioning Control toolbar the Explicit Position option.

The Explicit Position form appears. Set the Ship Position form format to XYZ, and key in X 100.00, Y 0.00,
Z 0.00. This is the plane in which the loop is defined (the start of the generated shape).

The Create section on the +ve Revolution form is now displayed Now the user is expected to select one of
the described creation methods from below.

Pick points Allows the user to pick points to create a surface to be revolved.
Pick lines Allows the user to pick lines to create a surface to be revolved.
Define a polygon Allows the user to define a polygon with a specific number of sides,
with given distance or length properties.
Define a rectangle Allows the user to define a rectangle with given X and Y length.
Define a circle Allows the user to define a circle with given radius.
Define an arc Allows the user to define an arc with a given radius and angle.
Define an arc by chord height Allows the user to define an arc with a given radius and chord
height.
Pick a profile to copy Allows the user to pick a previously created solid‟s profile to be
copied for another revolution.
Derive arc Allows the user to pick a graphic element to derive an arc.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 160
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Click the Pick points button. In the graphical view it now shows the rotational line and the start position for
the shape. If desired this plane can be flipped by clicking on the Flip button.

The Positioning Control toolbar is displayed once again, click on the Explicit Position icon.

The Explicit Position form is now displayed. Key in the values for the position of each Vertex, clicking
Apply for each new position.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 161
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Once all the Vertex positions have been entered, click the OK button on the +ve Revolution form and the
Revolution primitive is created.

If Modification checkbox is checked before OK button was clicked +ve Revolution form leads the user to
Loop Vertex Editor form which could be retrieved from Modify > Primitives and used in both negative
extrusion and revolution primitives‟ modification.

 For more information on how to use the Loop Vertex Editor form
functionalities see AVEVA Marine Structural Modelling (Basic)
(TM-2221) Guide

The Revolution Vertexes have an attribute Fradius, if we change this for the vertices 3 and 4 then this will
modify the extrusion as shown.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 162
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.10.3 Modifying Stretch / Trim a Primitive

 A macro file will be provided by the trainer, navigate to WORLD level, then drag the macro file
‘Stretch_Trim_Primitives.txt’ into the Command Window

This function allows the user stretch (increase) or trim (decrease) the dimensions of the constituent
primitives of an equipment.

Stretching or trimming a primitive is achieved by


moving one of the end Ppoints of the primitive to
another position. This can be achieved by the
following options, displayed by selecting Modify >
Stretch/Trim from the main menu. The user must
make the primitive to be trimmed the CE in the
Design Explorer.

All Sides Allows the user to stretch / trim the primitive to a given value.
ID P-Point Allows the user to stretch / trim the primitive to a given value in the direction
of a picked P-Point on the primitive.
To P-Point Allows the user to pick a P-Point to be stretched / trimmed to another
picked P-Point.
To Pline Allows the user to pick a P-Point to be stretched / trimmed to a picked Pline.
Clearance to P-Point Allows the user to pick a P-Point to be stretched / trimmed to another
picked P-Point with a given clearance.
Clearance to Pline Allows the user to pick a P-Point to be stretched / trimmed to a picked Pline
with a given clearance.

Select Modify > Stretch/Trim > To P-Point and use the cursor to pick the P-Point to be stretched / trimmed
as shown..

Now use the cursor again to pick the P-Point to stretch / trim the first P-Point to. A confirm dialogue box
appears asking “Return CYLI to original size and position?” Click No

 If two edge P-Points on the same primitive are selected, the distance between the two points will
become zero. The procedure cannot be used to invert a primitive and the procedure is not applicable to
nozzles or torus’s

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 163
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.10.4 Sliding a Primitive

The facilities available from this submenu let the user slide (move) the current element in the direction of a
selected P-Point.

Select Modify > Slide > To P-Point and use the cursor to pick the P-Point to be slid (moved) Now use the
cursor again to pick the P-Point to slide the first P-Point to.

To P-Point Allows the user to pick a P-Point the primitive to be moved.


To Pline Allows the user to pick a Pline the primitive to be moved.

A confirm dialogue box appears asking “Return CYLI to original position?” Click No

9.10.5 Checking the P-point Position of a Primitive

The position (coordinates) of the P-points of a primitive by using the Query form. For example for a Box
primitive, the position of all P-points from P0 to P6 can be checked.

The P-Points are in the centre of each face


apart from the origin of the box, P0, which
is in the centre of the box.
P4 P3 P2
 For the position of all P-points for
P0 other primitives refer to Appendix A of
this guide.
ZLENGTH
P1
P5 P6
P
XLENGTH 0 YLENGTH

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 164
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Selecting Query > General from the main menu will display the Query form.
Here the user can select the required P-point from the pull-down menu.

The position of the P-point can be queried with respect to various elements, such
as Owner and World, by selecting the required element from the Wrt pull-down
menu.

The position of the p-point is displayed in the Query form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 165
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.11 List

Lists are a temporary collection of elements on which


operations can be performed that affect all the members of
the list. Lists only last for the duration of Design session
unless Forms & Display are saved. Current List
The current list is displayed on a pull-down on the Default
toolbar.

If there is no current list defined the pull-down will display No list. The pull-down also lets the user select the
current list if more than one list has been defined in the current session.

Selecting Utilities > Lists from the main menu or clicking the Create/Modify Lists icon from the Default
toolbar displays the Lists/Collections form.

or

The first step is to create a list by selecting Add > List from the form menu bar. A Create List form is
displayed that allows the user to give a Description to the list. The Description of the list will appear in the
List pull-down on the form. Any list can be saved selecting Control > Save or restored from the previous
change(s) by selecting Control > Restore

Elements may be added to the list by using the Add menu on the form.

The Add menu allows the user to select members to add to the list. The options are;
CE Adds the current element
CE Members Adds the elements whose owner is the current element.
Identified Adds elements by identifying them with the cursor. Pressing the Esc key on the keyboard
ends the selection.
Selection… Adds elements selected by use of the Add to List form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 166
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

One or more element types, i.e. SCTN, PANE, may be entered in the Selection text box to filter the
elements desired to add to the list.

The selection may be further refined by adding a valid PML expression to the with Rule text box. Examples
of with Rule include;
SPREF EQ /DIN-SPEC/HE300A will add all HE300A sections in the selection source to the list.
GTYP NE „ANG‟ will add all SCTN elements whose Gtype is not equal to ANG in the selection source to the
list.
The source of the selection is made by clicking one of the following radio buttons.

For Element Enter an element, i.e. STRU or FRMW, name in the text box or navigate to an
element in the Members List and type CE in the text box. The option box on the
right allows the user to select the current DB or All DB‟s.
From List Select a list name, the Drawlist or the Obstlist from the pull-down.

The selection may also be made by specifying a volume, either explicitly or with 3D picks, and selecting
whether elements to be considered are either wholly or partially within the specified volume by checking the
appropriate check box. Whatever method is chosen to select the items to add to the list, the selected items
will appear in the main window of the Lists / Collections form.

The format of the displayed list is controlled by the Format pull-down. The list
may be displayed as element Name only, Description only or Name + Desc.

The elements in the list may be highlighted in the graphical view by checking the
Highlight check box at the top of the form.

AVEVA Marine commands may be directly applied to the list by entering valid AVEVA Marine syntax in the
text box at the bottom of the form and clicking the Action button. It is recommended that it is used this
option only if the user has a good understanding of AVEVA Marine syntax, otherwise use the list in
conjunction with the appware. Examples of entries in the Action text box include;

BY X 600 will move each element in the list by 600mm in the X


direction.
SPREF /DIN-SPEC/HE200A will change the Specification
Reference of all SCTN elements in the list to /DIN-SPEC/HE200A.

The contents of the list may be manipulated by removing elements from it. Selecting Remove from the
Lists/Collections form menu bar gives the user the same options as the Add menu described previously,
with the following additions

from List Removes the highlighted element from the list.


All Removes all elements from the list.

Choosing the Selection option from the menu displays the Remove
from List form which operates in the same way as the Add to List
form described previously.

List may be used where element selection is available on the appware


forms, usually via an options box. i.e., the Position By form, allows
the user to select a List as an option to apply the repositioning.

In this case the entered distances would be applied to all members of


the current list, which is selected from the Lists pull-down box on the
main toolbar.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 167
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.12 Positioning Control

There are four ways of setting the position attribute, Explicitly, Relatively, Using Ship References or by using
the Model Editor. Selecting Position > Explicitly (AT) will display the Positioning Control toolbar and the
Explicit Position form.

The Positioning Control toolbar (event-driven graphics) is shown automatically whenever the user needs to
pick positions in event-driven graphics mode. It lets the user specify how cursor picks are to be interpreted
as positions.

The Working Plane toggle provides a quick way of activating or deactivating the
working plane, if one exists.. If set to On, all picked positions will be projected onto
the current working plane.

The Positioning Control toolbar has two option lists from which the user can make the required selections.

Pick Type option lets the user control the types of items to which cursor picking will respond.
As the user moves the cursor over the 3D View, only items of the specified type will be
highlighted as the cursor passes over them. The identities of highlighted elements are shown
in the prompt bar, immediately above the graphical view.

The choices are,


Any The user can pick any element, aid, Pline or Ppoint.
Element Picking is restricted to elements.
Aid Picking is restricted to drawing aids.
Pline Picking is restricted to structural P-lines (Structural SCTN and GENSEC elements).
Ppoint Picking is restricted to P-points.
Screen Lets the user pick anywhere in the graphical view, which identifies two co-ordinates.
The third co-ordinate is taken from the current Working Plane.
Graphics Lets the user pick any graphical element (including aids, construction pins, edges of 3D
geometry etc.) that is displayed in the view.
External Lets the user to pick a point in the laser model point cloud, i.e. graphical data provided by
the external system when using the Laser Model Interface.

The Pick Method option determines how the position will be derived from subsequent
cursor picks. The currently selected mode is shown in the prompt bar.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 168
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The options are,

Snap Selects the snap point nearest to the cursor pick point.
Picked position

Start End

Derived position

Distance Applies the offset value, which entered in the adjacent text-box (i.e. 500 gives a point 500
mm from the nearest snap point, measured towards the cursor position; –500 gives a point
500 mm from the nearest snap point, measured away from the cursor position).
Picked position
Start
End
- Value + Value
Derived position Derived position

Mid-Point Derives the mid-point between two snap points along a linear item

Picked position

Start End
= =

Derived position

Fraction Subdivides the distance between two snap points into a specified number of parts
(as entered in the adjacent text-box). Then derives the fractional position closest to the
cursor pick (i.e. 6 gives a point at the nearest sixth of the distance along the line joining the
first snap point to the second snap point).
Picked position
 The length of the picked item is subdivided into
Start End equal parts (6 in this example), each of which
behaves as a snap length in its own right. Thus
Derived position the derived position is at the nearest integral
fraction to the picked position

Proportion Derives the point whose proportional position between two snap points has been entered in
the adjacent text-box (i.e. 0.25 gives a point 25% along the line joining the first snap point
to the second snap point).
Picked position
Start
End  The value is expressed here as a
Value proportion of the distance from start to
end
Derived position

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 169
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Intersect Lets the user pick two lines (any directional items) or three planes and then it derives their
intersection point.
Derived position
 Linear items picked do not need to intersect. A
Picked position derived position is determined at the projected
1 intersection of second picked item onto first picked
item, so order of picking is significant

Second picked position


2
Cursor Places the derived point exactly where the cursor picks on the element.

The Explicit Position form lets the user position an element either by
typing in co-ordinates or by reference to the position of another design
item.

Use of the Datum option allows identification of the specific point on the
element to which the position is to apply.

Designate Position allows the user to


pick the datum postion of the element
using any of the facilities provided by
the Positioning Control toolbar.

To define a position explicitly, enter the required co-ordinates in the X / -X, Y / -Y and Z / -Z boxes, using the
scrollable lists to set the appropriate direction in each case. If necessary, use the, wrt (with respect to) box to
identify the element whose co-ordinate system is to be used for the Position data. By default wrt textbox is
always set to World (/*) element and possible to type an element name whose co-ordinate system to be
referenced, such as other EQUI elements.

To define a position by reference to existing design items, use the Positioning Control toolbar and the
cursor to identify the required positions by picking them in a graphical view. If required, the Lock checkboxes
can be used to fix the current co-ordinate along any axis.

To position another element, use the Select pull down menu options to change the focus of the
form. Use the CE or Owner option if the user has already navigated to the required item, or
use the Pick or Pick Owner option and then pick the required item when prompted.

The form will display the current position and the user can then change any part of this by entering new
values. The position the user gives will be relative to the Datum, which may be the Origin or a selected ID
Design point.

The Explicit Position button lets the user bypass any graphical picking operation by entering an explicit
position. Click it to display the Explicit Position form. This form allows the position to be expressed as a
Ships Grid position, and can also be changed to display the position in XYZ or ENU formats by right mouse
clicking in the form to display the format options.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 170
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Selecting Position > Using Ships References will display the


Position -Ships Reference form.

The Position -Ships Reference form is a tracking form which means


when the user navigates to an element, the form automatically updates
itself to the current database‟s element, showing its position both in
terms of the ships reference system and absolute position X, Y, and Z

Selecting Position > Relatively (BY) will display the following menu, as well as the Positioning Control
toolbar.

The values the user gives will position the item by that amount relative to its origin.

Using Equipment or Volume as Origin Using Primitive as Origin

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 171
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.13 Alternative Positioning Forms

The following forms can also be used to position Equipment elements and their members. In the Equipment
module there are two main forms to consider which are available from the application pull-down menu:-

 Move form - accessed using Position > Move…


 Drag Move form - accessed using Position > Drag…

9.13.1 Move Form

The Move form is used to move the current element in a given direction. This
can be a specified distance in that direction, to a position relative to another
element, or relative to a plane through a given component.

Both the Move and Drag Move forms have four common tabs:-

 Distance
 Through
 Clearance
 Towards

9.13.1.1 Distance Tab

Movement The Distance tab allows the user to move the


Direction current element so that its origin or nominated
PPoint moves a distance in a given direction.
Distance

The Parameters section of the Move form allows the user to set the
following:-
 Origin – using a scrollable to select Origin, Arrive or Leave.
 Distance
 Direction
 WRT – sets the frame of reference for the direction of movement
With Respect To a specified element.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 172
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The WRT setting can be influenced by the four buttons as explained:-

- Direction with respect to itself

- Direction with respect to owner or first ancestor that has an orientation


- Direction with respect to the World
- Direction with respect to a picked element

For very simple movements the Parameters section of the form can be employed on its own with the Target
section using the Relative To setting of No Target, for example:-

However the Target section of the form provides additional functionality:-


 Relative To - allows the user to select from numerous options to determine how the element is
positioned in relation to the target element or position.
In Front / Behind

On Top / Under From / Towards

Distance To
Distance
On Top
Distance From

Distance
Under

Movement
Movement Direction
Direction
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 173
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

With the Relative To option set to something other than No Target, the Select options become available to
the user. The setting of this option determines how the remainder of this form will function as shown:-

Selecting the Element option allows the user to specify the element to be
referenced either by keying in the name or by clicking the Pick Target
Element button and indicating the element in the 3D View.

Alternatively, selecting the Position option forces the users to click the
Pick Target Position button. This allows the user to use the Positioning
Control toolbar to perform an EDG pick to specify the position in the 3D
View.

The resulting position is indicated in the 3D View as an aid as shown.

Checking the Plane Through Target check box allows the user to
specify the direction of the Plane. The current element is moved so that
its origin moves a given distance in a given direction, where the distance
is measure from intersection of direction of movement and the reference
plane. The reference plane is specified relative to the element or position
nominated in the Select scrollable list.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 174
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.13.1.2 Through Tab

The Through tab allows the user to move the


element in a given direction until it reaches a point
Plane or is relative to a plane perpendicular to the
Through direction of movement through another point.

Movement
Direction

The Parameters section of the form is identical to that detailed for


the Move tab with the exception that there is no Distance input
text box.

Unlike the Move tab the Target section must be used to perform
an operation. The Target section of the form is similar to that
detailed for the Move tab. However there is no Relative To
scrollable list and the Through scrollable list is the same as the
Select version on the Move tab.

Checking the Plane Through Target check box allows the user to
specify the direction of the Plane. The current element is moved so
that its origin moves to the intersection of the direction of movement
and the reference plane. The reference plane is specified relative to
the element or position nominated in the Through scrollable list.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 175
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.13.1.3 Clearance Tab

Movement
Direction The Clearance tab allows the user to move the
element in a given direction so that its obstruction
volume or a Ppoint is a given clearance from another
element. The clearance is measured in the same
direction as the movement.

Clearance

The Parameters section of the Clearance tab differs slightly in that


the Origin also contains an All option which allows for any obstruction
volumes. The user can also specify the amount of Clearance
required.

The remainder of this form works in the same fashion as the Move
tab.

The illustration below shows how the Clearance tab can be used in conjunction with the Relative To options
to great effect.

In Front / Behind

Clearance Clearance
In Front Behind
Movement
Direction

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 176
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

On Top / Under From / Towards

Clearance To

Clearance
On Top Clearance From

Clearance
Under

Movement
Movement
Direction Direction

Towards Tab

The Towards tab allows the user to move the


element a given distance in a direction specified in
terms of another element.

Distance

Movement
Direction
Towards
Target

The Towards tab is much simpler than the previous tabs, but uses
the Parameters and Target sections in an identical manner.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 177
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.13.2 Positioning Using P-points

All the AVEVA Marine primitives have a number of predefined points on their surfaces known as P-Points.
i.e., a cylinder has seven P-Points, P0 (the origin), P1 and P2 at either end and P3 to P7 positioned radially
in the middle of the cylinder, 90 degrees apart.. P0 is normally used for general positioning whereas P1 to
P7 are used for connecting or positioning relatively.

The user can connect a P-Point on the current element to any other P-Point
in the design. The act of connecting both positions and orientates the
current element such that the two connected points are at the same position
and facing each other. i.e. P1 on the cylinder connect to P4 on the box using
Connect > Primitive > ID Point

P1

P4

 Refer to section 9.16 for further details.

9.13.3 Positioning Using PINs

PINs are a set of ten temporary marker points which have a 3D position and direction. They can be moved
around using positioning and orientation commands similar to those available for permanent outfitting
elements. Once positioned, a pin may either be used as a static reference point or as a temporary P-point.

The commands described here only show how to make pins visible and position and orientate them. Once
this has been done they can be used for positioning and orientating design elements in any command that
uses point as an argument, for example when using Position > Equipment Point > At General, covered in
the next section of this guide.

PIN 5 AT X1000 Pin 5 will be moved to the coordinate position 1000 from the Site origin.
PIN5 DIR X WRT SITE Pin 5 will be orientated in an X direction with respect to the current SITE.
PIN 5 Pin 5 will be drawn into all volume views, and can be hit by the cursor.
PIN 5 OFF Pin 5 will be erased.
PIN 5 COPY IDP @ Pin 5 will be placed at the same position and orientation as the P-point or
pin hit by the cursor.

 When a pin is switched off, it is erased from the display, but it still exists and can be referred to by
name. Pin positions are not saved between sessions.

9.14 Positioning Equipment Point

The facilities on this submenu let the user reposition an equipment


element by repositioning a P-Point of one of its primitives (an Equipment
Point).

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 178
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.14.1 At Explicit

From the pull down menu select Position > Equipment Point > At
Explicit, in the lower left hand corner a screen prompt appears, asking
the user to Identify a point on FWC1002. By depressing the left hand
mouse button and moving the cursor over the equipment the required
point can be selected.

Once the point required is selected, the Position form is displayed. The user can then change the X Y and Z
positions as required. Clicking the Apply button will reposition the element with the picked P-point at the
new position. If the user wants is not happy with the new position of the element, clicking the Reset button
sets the element back to its original position. If the position is suitable and no further positioning is to be
carried out, click the Dismiss button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 179
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.14.2 At General

From the pull down menu select Position > Equipment Point > At General, in the lower left hand corner a
screen prompt appears, asking Identify a point on FWC1002. By depressing the left hand mouse button and
moving the cursor over the equipment the required point can be selected.

Once the point required is selected, the Position form is


displayed, from the pull down menu select the method of
repositioning the P-Point and click Apply. The options available
are;

Cursor Give two 'free space' cursor hits to define a new 3-D position. The equipment moves such
that the picked P-Point is at the new position.
ID Cursor Use the cursor to identify a primitive (sensibly a member primitive of the current equipment
element, but could be any primitive). The equipment moves such that the equipment origin
is at the (old) P0 position of the picked primitive.
ID P-Point Use the cursor to identify a P-Point (this can be from any Primitive, it does not need to be
part of the Equipment being positioned). The equipment moves such that the picked P-Point
moves to the position of the P-Point identified at the top of the Position form.
Name Use the cursor to identify a P-Point within the current equipment element. The Name form
appears. Enter the name of an element at the position to which desired to move the
current element. Click OK button on the Name form. The current equipment element moves
such that the picked P-Point moves to the origin of the named element.
Pin Use the cursor to identify a P-Point within the current equipment element. The Pin Number
form appears. The current equipment element moves such that the picked P-Point moves to
the selected pin.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 180
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

In this example, selecting ID P-point and clicking Apply prompts the user to identify the design P-point the
first picked P-point will be positioned to. Using the left hand mouse button select the required P-Point. If the
new position is not suitable, the Reset button can be selected, this will set the equipment back to its original
position. If the position is suitable and no further positioning is to be carried out. Click the Dismiss button.

9.14.3 Through

From the pull down menu select Position > Equipment Point > Through, in the lower left hand corner a
screen prompt appears, asking ‘Identify a point on FWC1002’. By depressing the left hand mouse button
and moving the cursor over the equipment the required point can be selected.

Once the point required is selected, the Move form is


displayed, this form moves the current element so that its
origin or other P-Point lies on a plane perpendicular to the
direction of movement. The plane is defined relative to a
reference point. from The method of repositioning the P-
Point can be selected from Through pull down menu, and
clicking Apply.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 181
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The options available are:

Cursor Use the cursor to define the point to move to (along the move direction, i.e. the reference
point). The current element will be moved in the given direction until its origin or a P-Point
lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the reference point.
ID Cursor Use the cursor to pick a primitive to move to (along the move direction, i.e. the reference
point). The current element will be moved in the given direction until its origin or a P-Point
lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the reference point.
ID P-Point Use the cursor to pick a P-Point to move to (along the move direction, i.e. the reference
point). The current element will be moved in the given direction until its origin or a P-Point
lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the reference point.
Name Use the cursor to identify a P-Point within the current equipment element. The Name form
appears. Enter the name of an element at the position to which the user wants to move the
current element, thus defining the reference point as the origin of that element. Click OK
button on the Name form. The current element will be moved in the given direction until its
origin or a p-point lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the
reference point.
Coordinate The Coordinate form appears, enabling the user to select a direction and a value. This
defines a plane at the given coordinate. Then, when the user clicks Apply on the Move
form, the current element will be moved in the direction given on the Move form until its
origin or a P-Point lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the
reference point.
Pin Use the cursor to identify a P-Point within the current equipment element. The Pin Number
form appears, enabling the user to pick a pin as the reference point. When the user clicks
Apply on the Move form, the current element will be moved in the direction given until its
origin or a P-Point lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the
reference point.

In this example, ID P-point has been selected, and the Direction has been set to Z.
Now in the lower left hand corner a screen prompt appears, asking ‘Identify design ppoint’. Picking the P-
point at the top of EQUI FWC1003 will move the equipment in the Z direction so the two picked P-points line
up in the plane perpendicular to the Z direction.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 182
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.14.4 Clearance

From the pull down menu select Position > Equipment Point > Clearance, in the lower left hand corner a
screen prompt appears, asking Identify a point on FWC1002. By depressing the left hand mouse button and
moving the cursor over the equipment the required point can be selected.

Once the point required is selected, the Move form is displayed, this form moves the current element so that
its origin or other P-Point is a given Clearance from another element, in a given Direction.

The first pull down is set to show how the distance is related to the point the user will specify in the next pull
down. The options available are:

Infront / Behind Can be used for any direction in a plan view.


Distance is measured along direction of movement, relative to a
specified point.
Onto / Under Can be used with any direction in an elevation view.
Distance is measured along direction of movement, relative to a
specified point.
From / To Can be used for any X, -X, Y or -Y view direction.
Distance is measured along direction of movement, relative to a
specified point.

The second pull down is set to show how the user will specify the
reference point from which the clearance is measured.

Cursor A cursor-identified 3D position


ID Cursor A cursor-identified item whose origin is at the required
position
ID P-Point A cursor-identified P-Point at the required position
Coordinate An explicit position whose coordinates the user will
enter
Name A named item whose origin is at the required position
Pin A numbered construction pin at the required position

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 183
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

In this example we have selected Direction X, Clearance 400mm, Infront and ID P-Point. click Apply.
Other combinations will require the user to either pick with the cursor or enter data on the resulting form,
depending on how it is chosen to specify the position.
Now in the lower left hand corner a screen prompt appears, asking the user to identify the P-point to be used
to set the clearance from. Picking the P-point shown on equipment FWC1003 will move FWC1002 in the X
direction, to a point where there is 400mm clearance between the two picked P-points.

9.15 Orientation

Like positioning, orientating items can be done in a number of ways. The Model Editor is the preferred way
to orientate. However, orientation options are also available using the application menus. The orientation
options are split into different categories for safety reasons, so that the user does not inadvertently orient the
equipment when the user expected to orient a primitive.

The options on this menu let the user redefine the orientation of equipment
items. The menus are split as follows.
Orientate > Axes
Orientate > Rotate
Orientate > Primitive > Point

9.15.1 Orientate Axis

This option lets the user orientate an element by


specifying the directions of two of its axes. A
limits box for the current element is drawn in the
3D View, together with a display of its X, Y, and
Z axial directions.

Two of the axial directions (X and Y by default)


are shown in the data-entry fields in the centre
of the form, with the derived third direction
immediately below them. To change these
explicitly, use the option controls to select the
axes to be set and enter their required
directions.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 184
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Entering a value into the X text boxes will


automatically update the Y text box, and vice
versa.

9.15.2 Orientate Rotate

This option lets the user redefine the orientation of an equipment item relative to its current orientation by
rotating it through a specified angle about a given axis.

In this example the Equipment has been rotated 30 degrees, with the rotation axis set in the Z (vertical)
direction.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 185
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.15.3 Orientate Primitive Point

This option lets the user redefine the orientation of a member primitive of an equipment item by re-
orientating one of its P-Points.

In this example the direction of the P1 P-point of the BOX 6 primitive has been changed from Z to X. The
primitive is rotated 90 degrees to face in an X (Forward) direction.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 186
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.16 Connect

The Connect menu lets the user position and orientate an equipment primitive by nominally connecting it to
an adjacent primitive.

 These options do not set up any connection cross-references (which are not applicable to equipment
primitives). They only move one primitive to align it with another

The menus are split as follows.


Connect > Primitive > ID Point
Connect > Primitive > Explicit

9.16.1 ID Point

 A macro file will be provided by the trainer. Clear the 3D view, then navigate to the World level and drag
the macro file Primitive_Connect.txt into the Command Window

This option lets the user position one primitive such that one of its P-Points is coincident with a P-Point of
another primitive. The cursor is used to select the P-Points.

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the primitive the user wants to move, from the pull down menu select
Connect > Primitive > ID Point, in the lower left hand corner a screen prompt appears, asking „Pick on a
point on the current item‟. By depressing the left hand mouse button and holding the cursor over the
primitive the required point can be selected.

Once the point has been selected, the screen prompt changes asking ‘Pick the point to connect to’,
indicate the primitive and point on the primitive to connect to. A Confirm form is displayed, click No and the
first primitive P-Point is moved and orientated to the second primitive‟s P-Point.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 187
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.16.2 Explicit

This option lets the user position one primitive such that one of its P-Points is coincident with a P-Point of
another primitive. The P-Points are selected explicitly.

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the primitive to be moved,


then select the primitive to move to. The Explicit P-point
Connection form will be displayed.

Connect Point This shows the currently selected P-Point on the current primitive; i.e. the one that
is to be moved. Use the scrollable list to select an alternative P-Point if required.

To Point This shows the currently selected P-Point on the primitive that is to be moved to.
Use the scrollable list to select an alternative P-Point if required.

Set the Connecting point using the scrollable pull down for the first primitive to 1 (P1), then set the To Point
on the second primitive to 3 (P3) and click Apply

9.17 Model Editor

In the Model Editor display mode, one or more elements can be selected and moved or
rotated dynamically by dragging with the mouse pointer. The Model Editor mode is
entered by selecting the Model Editor icon on the Model Editor Toolbar. To return from
the Model Editor to Design Navigate mode select the icon again.

Alternatively, select Edit > Model Editor from the main pull down menu to enter and
leave Model Editor mode.

If Items are selected in the 3D design whilst in Model Editor


Mode the Model Editor handle is displayed.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 188
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.18 Set Increment Values

Select Selection > Set Increments from the main menu.

The Set Increments form is displayed, the Linear increment will change the value of the handle when
dragged, the Fine linear increment will change the value when the keyboard arrows are used, and the
Angular increment will change the value of the handle when dragged.

Linear increment This is specified in the currently active units, or units can be specified by using
AVEVA Marine units of measure syntax. The Linear increment controls the step size
used when dragging a Graphical Selection using a linear or planar handle. The
default step size is 50mm or 2inches.

Fine linear increment This has the same function as the linear increment, but with a default step size in
5mm. Fine 'nudges' are achieved by using the '2' and '8' numeric keypad keys or
the arrow keys with the mouse button held down.

Angular increment This controls the angular step size used when dragging a Graphical Selection using
a rotation handle. The default step size is 5 degrees.

In the Fine linear increment change the default value 5 to 1 and click the OK button.

Now select the pipe modification handle, click the arrows on the keyboard and the increments now should
just move 1mm at a time.

Linear increment Fine linear increment Angular increment

 The default setting is 50mm and 5mm for fine adjustment

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 189
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.19 Locking / Unlocking Objects

The user can lock any outfitting element to prevent it from being modified or deleted. No changes to the
element are then possible until it is unlocked.

To apply or remove this protection, select Modify > Lock to display the Lock form The name of the Current
Element is displayed in the form.showing the name of the current element.

Lock CE Locks current element only

Lock CE and below Locks current element and its members

Unlock CE Unlocks current element only

Unlock CE and below Unlocks current element and its members

Select the lock option required and then click Apply. If a locked object is selected for modification, then an
Error message will be displayed in the graphical view.

 If the element is locked this will prevent it from being deleted

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 190
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.20 Equipment Model Editor Pop-ups

A collection of handles which together provide a mechanism for positioning and orientation of selected
AVEVA Marine elements. The Locator Handle can be used to drag the entire Graphical Selection to a new
position or rotate the entire Graphical Selection through an angle about a selected axis.

The Locator Handle can be moved or rotated independently of the Graphical Selection. This allows the user
to set a datum for movement and alignment operations, or to set an axis of rotation about which the
Graphical Selection will be rotated.

The Linear Movement Handle A handle situated on the Locator Handle, which when selected for a drag
operation, constrains movement of the selection to be along the direction of
the selected major axis.

The Planar Movement Handle A handle situated on the Locator Handle, which when selected for a drag
operation, constrains movement of the selection to be in the plane indicated
by the planar movement handle. That is the XY, XZ or YZ plane of the
Locator Handle.

The Rotation Handle A handle situated on the Locator Handle, which when selected for a rotation
operation, constrains movement of the selection to be about the axis
corresponding to the selected rotation handle.

The Locator Handle provides three ways to move or


Rotation
rotate a Graphical Selection.
about single
 Dragging the linear, planar or rotation handles
axis
freehand with the mouse pointer
 Aligning with points, P-points, P-lines or
Planar straight lines (edges) on other displayed plant
movement items
handles  Typing in world position, offset distance or
Linear
movement in angular displacement values.
axis direction
9.20.1 Linear Handle Pop-ups

The following options are available, shown by right-mouse clicking on


the Model Editor linear movement handles.

Enter Value Gives the Move Selection form, enabling the


user to enter a value to move
the graphical selection along the selected linear movement handle.

Align with Feature Allows the user to position the Graphical Selection in relation to another object
on the screen, but forces the Graphical Selection to move only along the
selected axis.

Offset From Feature Works in a similar way to Align With Feature, but also gives the user the option to
specify an offset position from the selected feature.

Snap to Point Allows the Graphical Selection to be moved to a Point feature. The Graphical
Selection is not constrained to move along the direction of the Linear Handle

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 191
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Move Handle Allows the user to move the Locator Handle, using the same movement options
as the main Linear Handle menu. These options move the Locator Handle only;
they do not move the Graphical Selection. Alternatively a 'freehand' movement of
the Move Handle can be accomplished by pressing the H key with the handle
selected and the left mouse button held down.
Moving the Locator Handle independently of the Graphical Selection enables the
user to change the datum position for the next operation on the Graphical Selection.

Cancel Removes the shortcut menu and deselects the selected Locator Handle.

9.20.2 Rotation Handle Pop-up

The following options are available by right-mouse clicking the Model


Editor rotation handles.

Enter Value This gives the Rotate Selection About form, enabling the user to enter a
value to rotate the graphical selection about the selected rotational axis.

Orient to Point This allows the user to pick a p-line through a point with which to orient the
Rotation Handle.

Align with Direction This allows the user to identify features with which the handle is to be
aligned. Planes will be displayed to indicate a P-Point direction (pointer
symbol) or a p-line direction (symbol). Pressing and releasing the Shift key
will reverse the direction of the handle.

Align With This displays the Enter Direction For <direction> Axis form which allows
the user to align the handle with a specified direction, or as close as
possible to the given direction, about the axis of the cable tray.

Rotate Handle Allows the user to rotate the Locator Handle, using the same movement
options as the main Rotation Handle menu. These options move the
Locator Handle only; they do not move the Graphical Selection.
Alternatively a 'freehand' movement of the Rotate Handle can be
accomplished by pressing the H key with the handle selected and
the left mouse button held down.
The Locator Handle may be rotated independently of the Graphical
Selection in order to change the frame of reference for the next operation
on the Graphical Selection.

Rotate Handle > To World This option aligns the Locator Handle with the World co-ordinate system,
without rotating the Graphical Selection. The Locator Handle Y axis points
North and the Z axis points Up.

Cancel This removes the shortcut menu and deselects the selected Locator
Handle.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 192
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.21 Linear Movement (Enter Value)

With the equipment item to be moved the CE, selecting the Model Editor icon from the Model Editor
Toolbar will display the Model Editor Modification handle.

Right-mouse clicking over the linear handle displays


the pop-up menu. In this example, Enter Value has
been selected.

The Move Selection form appears. The user can key in the distance to move the equipment and then click
the Preview button, if the position is correct then clicking the OK button will move the equipment. If the
position is incorrect clicking the Cancel button will return the equipment back to the original position.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 193
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.22 Linear Movement (Align with Feature)

With the equipment item to be moved the CE, selecting the Model Editor icon from the Model Editor
Toolbar will display the Model Editor Modification handle.

Right-mouse clicking on the linear handle displays the pop-up menu. In this example, Align with Feature
has been selected.
Moving the cursor over the element to be aligned with will show the proposed new positions of the
equipment. Once the required position is achieved, left-mouse clicking on the point will move the equipment.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 194
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.23 Moving the Model Editor Handle

With the equipment item to be moved the CE, selecting the Model Editor icon from the Model Editor
Toolbar will display the Model Editor Modification handle.

Right-mouse clicking over the linear handle displays


the pop-up menu. In this example, Move Handle >
Snap to Point has been selected.

As the cursor is moved around the equipment, the Model Editor handle will snap to possible new positions
as the cursor is moved over them, such as on P-points, geometry edges and mid-points. When the desired
position is achieved, left-mouse clicking on the point will move the handle.

The linear movement features can now be applied to the new handle position.
 If the cursor is clicked in the 3D graphical view the handle will return to its original position
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 195
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.24 Moving Equipment (Snap to Point)

Right-mouse clicking with the cursor over the linear handle will display the pop-up menu. In this example
Snap to Point has been selected. Moving the cursor over the foundation will display the possible points to
snap to, i.e. end points and mid-points on the foundation geometry. As the cursor moves over the points, the
equipment moves to show the proposed new positions. Left-mouse clicking the point required will move the
equipment.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 196
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.25 Planar Moving (Enter Values)

With the equipment item to be moved the CE, selecting the Model Editor icon from the Model Editor
Toolbar will display the Model Editor Modification handle.

Right-mouse clicking with the cursor over the planar


movement handles displays the pop-up menu. In this
example Enter Value has been selected.

Clicking Enter Value from the pop-up menu displays the Move Selection form. The user can enter the
planar distances in the text boxes. Clicking the Preview button shows the proposed new position of the
equipment. If the position is correct then clicking the OK button will move the equipment to this point. If the
position is incorrect clicking the Cancel button will return the equipment back to the original position.

The planar features work in the same way as the linear features only they use two axis positions instead of
one.

Planar U, W axis Planar V, W axis Planar U, V axis

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 197
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.26 Angular Movement (Enter Value)

With the Model Editor Modification handle displayed,


right-mouse clicking the rotational movement handle,
displays the pop up menu.

Selecting Enter Value displays the Rotate Selection about U form. Here the user can enter the angle to
rotate the equipment. Clicking the Preview button shows the proposed new angle of the equipment. If the
rotation angle is correct then clicking the OK button will rotate the equipment. If the angle is incorrect,
clicking the Cancel button will return the equipment back to the original angle.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 198
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.27 Angular Movement (Orient to Point)

With the mouse button over the rotational movement


handle, clicking the right mouse button displays the pop
up menu.

In this example, Orient to Point is selected. Moving the cursor over points on the foundation will show
proposed points the equipment will be orientated to. The equipment is rotated so the linear handle nearest
the selected rotation handle is aligned with the point the cursor is currently over. When the cursor is over the
desired point, left-mouse clicking will orientate the equipment to this point.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 199
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.28 Angular Movement (Align with Direction)

With the mouse button over the rotational movement


handle, clicking the right mouse button displays the pop
up menu.

In this example, Align with Direction is selected. Moving the cursor over edges on the foundation will
display planes, and rotate the equipment aligning the linear handle nearest the rotation handle picked with
the plane. When the cursor is over the desired edge, left-mouse clicking will orientate the equipment to this
new direction.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 200
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.29 Angular Movement (Align With)

With the mouse button over the rotational movement handle,


clicking the right mouse button displays the pop up menu.

In this example, Align with is selected. Clicking Align With will display an Enter Direction… form. As the
rotation handle nearest the X axis of the equipment was selected, the form title is Enter Direction For X
Axis. Entering Y in the Direction text box will align the equipment in this direction. Clicking the Preview
button will show the proposed new orientation. If the rotation is acceptable, clicking the OK button will accept
the new orientation.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 201
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.30 Rotating the Model Editor Handle

The Model Editor handle can be rotated to allow the Linear,


Planar and Angular options of the Model Editor to be applied
in different orientations.
With the mouse button over the rotational movement
handle, clicking the right mouse button displays the pop up
menu.

The options available are Rotate Handle > Enter Value / Orient To Point / Align With Direction / Align
with / To World. These work in the same way as the equipment rotation covered previously, however only
the Model Editor handle is rotated, not the equipment.

In this example, Enter Value has been selected. This displays a Rotate Selection.. from, where the handle
can be rotated a given angle.

Entering the required angle, in this case 30 degrees, and clicking Preview will show the proposed new
orientation of the Model Editor handle. If the rotation is acceptable, click OK.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 202
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.31 Deleting an Equipment Primitive

To delete a primitive, first the user must navigate to the primitive in the Design Explorer to make it the
Current Element. The primitive selected is highlighted in the 3D view.

To delete the primitive, the user can either:

 Right-mouse click on the primitive in the Design Explorer,


and select Delete from the pop up menu

or

 Click the Delete CE icon from the Default toolbar.

or

 Select Delete > CE from the main menu.

The primitive to be deleted is


highlighted in the 3D view, and a
Confirm form is displayed.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 203
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Clicking Yes in the Confirm form will delete the primitive.

9.32 Deleting an Equipment

The same methods used to delete a Primitive can be used for deleting an Equipment element. With
Equipment elements, the user can navigate to the element in the Design Explorer, but can also graphically
pick the equipment in the 3D view to make it the Current Element.

The Equipment to be deleted is


highlighted in the 3D view, and a
Confirm form is displayed. Clicking
Yes will delete the Equipment
element.

 If an equipment / primitive has been deleted by mistake and the changes have not
yet been saved then by clicking the Undo icon from the Model Editor Toolbar, the
equipment / primitive will brought back and visible in the Design Explorer and the
graphical view once again
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 204
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.33 Editing Equipment Primitives Graphically

In Equipment Editing mode, individual member primitives (including negative primitives) can be modified
graphically using the standard movement handles.
 The user does not need to be in the Equipment application to be able to use the graphical equipment
editing facilities
To enter equipment editing mode and edit an equipment primitive enter Model Editor mode by clicking the
Model Editor icon from the Model Editor Toolbar.

Right-click on the equipment and from the pop up menu and select Edit Members of Equipment. All other
elements except the selected Equipment will be displayed translucent in the 3D view.

If the Equipment is built up using sub-equipment


elements, right-clicking on the equipment once again
will display Edit Members of SubEquipment in the
pop-up menu. Now all elements in the Equipment other
than those owned by the selected sub-equipment are
displayed translucent.
Notice how all other elements except the selected
Equipment become translucent in the display.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 205
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

When in the Equipment Editing mode, the user is able to


graphically pick individual primitives to edit, and the Model
Editor handle is displayed at the origin or the selected
primitive. This modification handle works in the same way for
primitives as previously described for equipment elements,
allowing linear, planar and rotational movements for each
individual primitive.

In this example, the cylinder has been moved up 800mm.

To leave equipment editing mode, right click on the


active equipment and from the pop up select Exit
Equipment Editor

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 206
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Exercise 3 (Correcting Errors using Model Editor)

The object of this exercise is to correct the errors on two items of Equipment and their foundation.

Clear the 3D view, navigate to World level, and add in the datal file ‘Exercise_3.txt’. This will add a
foundation and two items of equipment (pumps) to the Design Explorer and 3D view. It will be apparent that
there are some errors with the items of equipment which will require correcting. These errors consist of the
following:

Size errors Some primitives have one of their size attributes incorrectly set. The task is to
identify which attributes are wrong and correct them.
Positional errors The Equipment elements are positioned incorrectly, and also some primitives are
incorrectly positioned within the owning Equipment.
Orientation errors Equipment and primitives are incorrectly orientated.

The method used, to change the size parameters are influenced by the type of shape the user is changing.
Quite appropriately, the different shapes have differing parameters to control their size. Cylinders have
Height and Diameter, whilst Boxes have Xlength, Ylength and Zlength.

To change the size parameters of a Primitive, the user can navigate to the primitive using the Design
Explorer, and then either select Modify > Primitive and set the size from the Modify Primitive form, or the
Attributes form can be used to edit the attribute values.

The foundation 311-FOUND needs to be repositioned to


accommodate the two pumps. The whole foundation
has to be selected before using the Model Editor to
rotate and reposition.

The equipment YY9008 needs to be re-assembled the


same as YY9007, i.e. two cylinders need to have their
Diameter attributes changed, and one cylinder and one
extrusion need to be re-assembled in the correct
position and orientation. Use equipment YY9007 to find
out what the correct diameter attributes should be.
YY9008

YY9007

311-FOUND

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 207
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.34 Equipment Nozzles

A nozzle is an interface point between the equipment and the connecting Pipework. Nozzles are positioned
and orientated (and given a height dimension) like other primitives, but must be selected from the catalogue
via a Specification (for the bore to be assigned).

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the equipment element /LOS1011 to


which the nozzle will belong. Now to create the nozzle select Create >
Nozzles from the main pull down menu.

The Create Nozzle form is displayed, key in the Name for the Nozzle /LOS1011-N3, and key in the Height
200mm

Now click the Nozzle Type button and a Nozzle Specification form appears. Set the nozzle specification to
DIN DICHTFLAECHE C, Generic Type to ND-16RF, Nominal Bore to 25 and then click Apply, then
Dismiss to close the Nozzle Specification form.

Now on the Create Nozzle form, the nozzle specification and parameter have been set, click Apply, the
nozzle is displayed in the graphical view, positioned at the origin of the owning Equipment, and will require
moving to its correct position and orientation within the equipment.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.35 Modifying the Nozzle Specification

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the nozzle that requires to be changed, Select Modify > Nozzle
Specification from the main pull down menu. The Nozzle Specification form appears, this allows the user
to change the Specification, Generic Type and the Nominal Bore. In this case the Nominal bore has been
changed. Click Apply to activate the changes, the graphical display will change to the new nozzle size.

25NB Nozzle 50NB Nozzle

The Nozzle Attributes form is displayed by selecting Modify > Nozzle Attributes from the main menu. This
form can be used to change the nozzle attributes, including Height, Description and Purpose.

These Attributes could also be changed using the standard


Attributes form

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 209
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.36 Worked Example – Creating an Equipment

In this worked example, an Equipment element (a simple vertical vessel) will


be created.

EQUI elements need to be created in a Zone. In this example, the previously


created Zone 311_NEW_EQUI will be used.

9.36.1 Create the EQUI Element

Clear the 3D view, and make Zone 311_NEW_EQUI the Current Element. From the main menu, select
Create > Equipment, and the Equipment Creation form is displayed.
In the Equipment Creation form, enter FWC1500 in the Name text box, leave the Position at X0, Y0, Z0,
leave the Attributes empty, and click OK. The EQUI FWC1500 is created.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 210
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.36.2 Creating Primitives

The next stage is to create Primitives which will be used to represent the physical geometry of the vessel. A
Cylinder primitive will be used for the main body of the vessel.

Make the newly created EQUI the CE,


then from the main menu select Create >
Primitives. The Create Primitives form is
displayed. Select Cylinder from the
Primitive Elements options, and the
Create Primitive Cylinder form is
displayed.

In the Create Primitive Cylinder form, enter 500mm for the Height, and
300mm for the Diameter, and click Create.

The Cylinder is created, and the Modify Primitive Cylinder form is


displayed, allowing the user to resize, reposition or reorientate the
primitive if required. In this case leave all the settings as they are, and
click Next.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 211
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The next stage is to create a Dish primitive to represent the dished end of the vessel.
Clicking Next from the Modify Primitive Cylinder form will have returned the user to the Create Primitive
form. Select Dish to display the Create Primitive Dish form.

Enter 300mm for the dish Diameter, 100mm for the dish Height, and click Create. The Dish is created,
positioned at the origin of the owning Equipment.

Clicking Create changes the form to Modify Primitive Dish mode. The dish needs to be moved 250mm in
the Z direction, to be positioned at the top of the cylinder. In the Z position textbox, enter 250mm. The dish
is moved 250mm up to the top of the cylinder.

Dismiss the Modify Primitive Dish form.


www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 212
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.36.3 Create Nozzles

The next stage is to create the two Nozzles at the top of the cylinder.

From the main menu, select Create > Nozzle, and the Create Nozzle form is displayed.

To create the first nozzle, enter FWC1500-N1 in the Name textbox. From the form, click the Nozzle Type
button to display the Nozzle Specification form, using the pull-down menus complete the form as shown
below. Click Apply, then Dismiss the form.

The Create Nozzle form updates to show the specification and bore set from the Nozzle Specification form.
The next step is to set the orientation, position and nozzle height. Key in the Orientation P1 as Z and the
Height of the nozzle as 75mm. Enter 425mm in the Z position textbox to position the Dish 425mm in the Z
(upward) direction, WRT the owning, then click Apply. The nozzle is created.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 213
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The second nozzle now needs to be created. Using the same method as before, create the new nozzle,
named FWC1500-N2. Set the Nozzle Type as ND-16RF and 15 Nominal Bore, the nozzle P1 orientation as
Z, the nozzle height as 200mm, and position the nozzle 425mm in the Z direction, and 125mm in the -Y
direction

The second nozzle /YY9991/N2 must be rotated 30 degrees around the first nozzle /FWC1500-N1. Indicate
the equipment and then click the Model Editor icon from the Model Editor Toolbar. The Equipment
modification handle appears, now click the right mouse button with the cursor over the equipment and select
Edit Members of Equipment

Selecting the nozzle to be rotated, FWC1500-N2, in the graphical view will allow the equipment modification
handle become available for the nozzle only. Move the cursor over the equipment modification handle and
then click the right mouse button, from the pop up menu select Move Handle > Snap to Point

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 214
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Move the cursor over the required P-Point (P1 p-point on nozzle
N1) as shown and then click the left mouse button. Now that the
handle is located at the nozzle in the centre of the equipment, the
nozzle can be rotated 30 degrees, with the axis of rotation at the
centre of the vessel.

Turn off the Model Editor.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 215
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.36.4 Negative Primitive

Negative primitives can be used to create cut-outs in positive geometry. A Negative primitive must belong to
a Positive (solid) primitive. In this example, a negative cylinder is to be added to the cylinder of the
equipment. Using the Design Explorer navigate to the cylinder which is to own the negative primitive. Select
Create > Primitives from the main pull down menu and the Primitives form is displayed. Click the Switch
to Negative Primitives button and the main form changes to Create Negative Primitive mode. Click the
Cylinder option from the Primitives form.

The Create Negative Primitive – Negative Cylinder form is displayed. Key in 250mm for both the Height
and Diameter. From the Obstruction pull-down menu, set the Obstruction level to None and click the Create
button. The negative primitive is created at the origin of the owning cylinder, and the Modify Negative
Primitive form is displayed. Since the negative cylinder is located completely inside the owning cylinder, it
will not be visible in the model

In the Rotation area of the Modify Negative Primitive form, enter


an angle of rotation of 90, and select the Direction of the rotation
axis to be U. Click the Apply Rotation button, and the negative
cylinder is rotated 90 degrees around the U axis.

 Ensure the Holes Drawn option is Off, in Settings > Graphics > Representation. This will allow the
negative extrusion outline to be selectable for use with Model Editor.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 216
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The negative cylinder now requires moving to its correct position. Indicate the equipment and then click the
Model Editor icon from the Model Editor Toolbar. The Equipment modification handle appears, now click
the right mouse button with the cursor over the equipment and select Edit Members of Equipment

Once again click the right mouse button with the cursor over the negative equipment cylinder and select
Edit Members of CYLINDER, this allows the negative cylinder to be moved using the equipment
modification handles. Move the Negative cylinder to its required position.

To see the hole, select Settings > Graphics, the Graphics Settings form
appears. Select the Representation tab and tick the Holes Drawn box and then
click Apply

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 217
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Exercise 4 - Create Equipment (Pressure Vessel)

Model the pressure vessel shown below. The pressure vessel belongs to Zone 311_NEW_EQUI. Use the
equipment name SAS1500.

Nozzle Specification Generic Type Nominal Bore


N1 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150
N2 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 65
N3 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150
N4 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150
N5 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150
N6 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150

Nozzles N5 and N6 extend 900mm from the origin of the main body of the pressure vessel.
The Negative Volumes are 830mm Diameter
900

400

200

2500
2800
2250

1250
850 950 250
550

25
900 750 1400

View Looking Fwd (X) View Looking Aft (-X)


N1 N1
N2
425 N2

N4
N6
N3 N3
30
N5
N1
N6
N5
N2 30
N4 N5

N3
45
250

Plan View (-Z) Isometric 3 Isometric 2


www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 218
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.37 Standard Equipment – a Worked Example

The Standard Equipment utility allows the user to select any standard equipment item from the range of
parameterised design templates available to the user.

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the Zone in which the Standard equipment is to be created, in this
case Zone 311_NEW_EQUI, then select Create > Standard Equipment from the pull down menus or click
the Create Standard Equipment icon from the Equipment Toolbar.

or

The Create Equipment form appears, key in the name


of the equipment LOS1500 and select the
Specification radio button. From the specification
scrollable list select AVEVA Standard Equipment.

From the standard list select the standard required, in this case “Standard” Standard Pumps >
“Centrifugal” Pumps > “Centreline” Mounted Centrifugal Pumps > “PUMP 005” Centreline mounted
tangential offset

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 219
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Then click the Properties button. This will display


the Modify Properties form This form shows a
Plotfile drawing of the Standard Equipment element,
showing the dimensions which can be set.

In the Modify Properties form, enter the required values A=1390, B=510, C=154, D=155, E=340, F=180,
G=545, H=70, J=135 and click OK

Click the Apply button to accept the choice, the Positioning Control form appears click Explicit Position
icon.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 220
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Explicit Position form is displayed. Key in the X 131000, Y 7000, Z


6350 positions and then click Apply. The equipment is created with the
origin at the specified position.

The Create Equipment form can now be dismissed.

Having given an explicit position for the pump, linear or rotational adjustments could be
made using the Model Editor.

If required the attributes for the newly created pump could be changed by
using the Attributes form as covered earlier in the guide.

The equipment attributes will be used later when the user looks at
database reporting.

 The Modify > Properties function can be used at any time to


change the parametric sizes of the standard Equipment.

The two Nozzles on the newly created standard equipment will need to have their name and nozzle
specification set. Using the Design Explorer navigate to each nozzle in turn , click the right mouse button
and from the pop up menu select Rename. The Name form is displayed, key in the new nozzle name
(LOS1500-N1 and LOS1500-N2) then click Apply

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 221
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

To modify the nozzle size and rating, select Modify > Nozzle Specification from the pull down menus. The
Nozzle Specification form appears, from the scrollable lists set the specification to DIN DICHTFLAECHE
C, Generic Type to ND-16RF, and the Nominal Bore to 100 and then click Apply

The Nozzle Attributes can also be modified by selecting Modify > Nozzle Attributes, the Nozzle Attributes
form is displayed, once the required attributes have been changed, click the OK button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 222
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.38 Selection Tables

The Selection Table radio button option on the Create Equipment form allows the user to select
Equipment from a table. Selection Tables for Equipment elements need to be created in the catalogue.
The table can be sorted and filtered to restrict the number of components displayed for selection.

In Selection Table mode, the user can select the main


category of equipment to be selected from. These could
include a company‟s standard equipment catalogue, and also
any project specific equipment catalogues.

Once the overall category is selected, the user can further filter
available selection in the grid by using the Type pull-down menu.

If the project has been configured with User Defined Element Types
based on Equipment, they will appear in the User Defined Type list.
When the equipment element is created, it will be created as the
User Defined Type selected from this list.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 223
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.39 Copying Equipment

Rather than create another standard equipment item, or even an equipment created with primitives, the user
can use the Copy facilities in the equipment application to create a duplicate pump and then rename it to
become a unique element. Using the Design Explorer navigate to the previously created Equipment
LOS1500. Select Create > Copy > Offset from the main pull down menus. The Copy with Offset form is
displayed. Key in 1 for the Number of Copies and 1000mm for the U Offset required, and click Apply

A Confirm window is displayed, giving the user the option to retain the created copies. Click Yes on the
form, and the new Equipment element is created.

Use Modify > Name to change the name of the equipment to LOS1501, and the nozzles to LOS1501-N1
and LOS1501-N2

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 224
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Object to be copied can be selected using the Object pull-down


menu. The options are CE, List or Pick.

The copy to option can be selected using the to pull-down menu, the
options are CE and Rel.

The CE option allows the user to navigate to a desired position in the hierarchy and pick the CE option; the
copied element will be created here. The Rel. option (relative) will create the new copied element in the
same position in the hierarchy as the copied item.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 225
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Exercise 5 (Create Standard Equipment (Heat Exchangers))

Create the two stacked exchangers, /SWC1500 and /SWC1501. Create the Equipments under existing Zone
311_NEW_EQUI. These can be built using standard equipment; the two standard equipments should be
created without any supports. Use “Standard” Heat Exchangers > “Horizontal” Shell and Tube Heat
Exchangers > “Horizontal” Dished and Flanged ends > “EXCH 005” Dished and flanged with nozzles.

Use the dimensions on the drawing below to build these two


Heat Exchangers.

Build one exchanger and then use copy function for the other.
The Nozzles should be rotated and the sizes checked.

Check that the Nozzle Names and specification have been SWC1500
changed to correspond with the Equipment Arrangement
drawing shown below. SWC1501

Nozzle Specification Generic Type Nominal Bore


SWC1500-N1 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 100
SWC1500-N2 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150
SWC1500-N3 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150
SWC1500-N4 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 100
SWC1501-N5 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 100
SWC1501-N6 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150
SWC1501-N7 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 100
SWC1501-N8 DIN DICHTFLAECHE C ND-16RF 150

3000

100 550 305

N2 N1

460
460 570

N3 N4
N6 N5
460 460

460

N8 N7
Dish Radius
50 2350 25

View Looking Aft (-X)

The position of the Explicit Position for Equipment SWC1500 is X 122400, Y -3150, Z 7500
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 226
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.40 Modifying a Design Items System Attribute

A system can be assigned to an Equipment item, for example a system could be applied corresponding to
the system of the connecting pipework. More than one system can be assigned to an equipment.

Using The Design Explorer navigate to the Equipment that


requires its design system to be modified, in this case
SWC1500, created in the previous exercise. Select Utilities >
Systems. And the Modify Design System form is displayed.
With the Main Systems tab visible, navigate to SYSGRP SWC.
With this system highlighted, the System Members grid of the
form is populated with all Equipment elements which currently
belong to this system.

Right-mouse click /SWC1500 in the Database


Items grid and select Add Selected
Element(s) to this System.

 It is possible to add Equipment elements to multiple


Systems.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 227
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Modify Design System


form in now updated to show
the new system in Main
Systems tab and System
Members grid. There is also
a Description and function
field that can be populated if
required.

The Main Systems tab shows systems directly referenced by


the selected element. The Owning Systems tab shows all
systems associated with the selected element, including those
inherited from elements higher in the Design hierarchy.

Clicking on the Apply Attributes button, or right clicking


on the equipment in System Members grid and selecting
Apply Attributes will apply the Systems Description and
Function attributes to the Equipment element.

It possible to remove an element from a design system by right clicking


and selecting Remove Selected Element(s) from this System in the
System Members grid, or by modifying the system attribute of the
element(s).

 The system attribute is mdsysf

The form can be closed by clicking the Close button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 228
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.41 Creating Equipment Points

This will allow the user to create a design pointset if none exist, this also lets the user create or modify the
design points for a template. Each type of design point is stored in an appropriate element (DPCA=
Cartesian; DPCY=Cylindrical; DPSP=Spherical) owned by a Design Pointset (DPSE). This will enable the
user to create points that will be used for the equipment associations.

Using the Design Explorer navigate to the element that requires new points to be added, then from the pull
down menu select Create > Points, the Design Points form is displayed.

The form lets the user build up and edit a list, each line represents one design point. All editing options are
controlled from the form‟s own menu bar; Create, Modify and Delete.

To create a new design point, select the required point type from the Create menu.
The options are;

Cartesian Point Specified in terms of X, Y coordinates only.


Cylindrical Point Specified as position on surface of cylinder at given position and with given
dimensions.
Spherical Point Specified as position on surface of sphere at given position and with given
dimensions.

From the Design Points form, Select Create > Cartesian Point…. The Create – Cartesian Design Point
form appears. Key in a description „Top Flange Alignment‟ in the Purpose field key-TFFA then click the OK
button.

 The Purpose could be set to say TOFA, BOFA etc. for the values to be display in the Equipment
Associations form. For this to work the user needs to have the characters FA in the third and fourth
character i.e. TOFA, BOFA etc.

From the Point Direction section of the form key in the


Direction of Design Point (Z) Z and the Normal direction (Y) Y

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 229
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Now from the form in the Positioning section click the Pick button, and the Positioning Control toolbar is
displayed. Set the Positioning Control settings to Ppoint and Snap

Holding down the left mouse button over the equipment pick the Ppoint to snap to.

The Positioning area of the Design Points form updates to shows the position to be used for Design Point.
Click OK and the newly created Design Point is added to the list on the form, has been added to the Design
Explorer and can be seen as an aid in the graphical view.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 230
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Several Design Points can be added to the object wherever necessary to suit the desired Equipment
Associations, as shown below.

Adding Design Point Number 2

Adding Design Point Number 3

Add the same design points to EQUI LOS1501.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 231
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.42 Equipment Associations

Associations can be created between items of Equipment. These Associations can be tested to check if an
equipment has moved from a required position, with respect to another Equipment element.
Before an equipment association can be created an Association World (ASSOWL) and an Association
Group (ASSOGP) must exist. If this is not done then the following error will be displayed.

 The association world (ASSOGP) must have it’s purpose set to ASEQ in
order to hold the association.

If no association world exists the command window can be used to key in NEW ASSOWL
/BASIC_ASSOCIATIONS and NEW ASSOGP /BASIC_ASSOCIATIONS_GROUP.

Set the Purpose of the ASSOGP to ASEQ

Drag into the graphical window


Equipments LOS1500 and LOS1501.
From the pull down menu select
Utilities > Equipment Associations,
the Equipment Associations form is
displayed. Click the Select
Association item and then pick an
element to associate with. In this case
pick the equipment LOS1500.

The Equipment picked is now displayed


complete with all the Equipment points avail
able for Equipment Associattions, (i.e. all
Points which end in FA).

 In order for Association Worlds to be visible in the Design Explorer, the


user must have the Hide non-user System Data checkbox unchecked in
the Explorer Settings form (open the form by selecting Settings >
Explorer).
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 232
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

There are several different association types that can be selected, the association types are;

Mate Align Parallel Parallel Offset

True Distance Elevation Horizontal Distance Point above line

In this case a new association will be made using the Align option, select the Align radio button and then
click the Select new Association partner and click LOS1501 in the graphical view.

The Equipment Associations form changes to now


show the two equipments and a pull down for the
Use reference Plane. This pull down may be used
to select previously created Design Points.
Select the FFFA point for both Equipments.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 233
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Key in the Association Name BASIC_TEST and then from the Separation
pull down select Max and key in the max allowable distance in this case
0.00. Now click the Create Association button.

Now in the Equipment Association


form, in the Associations
between these objects section,
the BASIC_TEST shows the test
Results as Passed.

Close the Equipment Associations


form.

9.42.1 Modifying Associations

Using the Design Explorer, navigate to the equipment element that requires its association to be modified, in
this case LOS1500. From the pull down menu select Utilities > Equipment Associations, the Equipment
Associations form is displayed. This shows the association in the Participates in associations section,
select the association BASICS_TEST. This now activates the Modify Associations and Delete Associations.
Click the Modify Associations link at the bottom of the Equipment Association form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 234
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Right-mouse click on the BASIC_TEST Association, and a pop-up menu is displayed. This gives the user
the following options:

Navigate To the Association in the Design Explorer.

Test this Association will check the association, and either display Passed or Failed.

Association Details… will display an Association Detail form displaying all the Property and Value of
each for the association.

The association can also be modified, by clicking the Modify Association link label. In this instance,
change the separation to 10mm, and the pull-down operator to Equals, then click the Apply Changes
button.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 235
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Because of the changes the association now fails i.e. Height


between the two design points does not equal 10mm.

As well as the Modify Association link label, the user also has the
option to delete an association (Delete Association link label) and
also to change the association partner Equipment element (Change
Association Partner link label).

Close the Equipment Associations form.

9.42.2 Association Manager

The Association Manager allows the user to view all the associations created using the Equipment
Associations utility and the standard Aveva Association object in a form.

To display the Association Manager, select


Utilities > Associations > Associations.

There could be many associations created in a project so the form allows various filtering methods.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 236
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Association Manager form is spilt into 3 areas. The first is the list of the Associations. This shows the
Association, Description, Purpose, Status and the 2 associated item names.

The second panel, Restrictions, shows the restrictions that make up the association and the status of the
restriction.
 Many associations are made up of 1 restriction but a few are made up of a number of restrictions, any
of which could lead to the failure of the association

The third panel, Association Detail, provides additional information regarding the association.

The Associations section of the Association Manager form, has several right click options,

View Association Items This option creates a new 3D view just showing the association items.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 237
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Navigate To This option allows the user to navigate to the Association, or either of the Association items
in the Design Explorer.

Association Association Item 1 Association Item 2

Delete Association This deletes the association.

Save Table to Excel This saves the association to an association report in .xls format.

Print Preview This gives a print preview of the Association, with the option to create a
print of the Association.

The Association Detail section also has some right-mouse click options,
Navigate to Target, Export to Excel and Print Preview. These work in the
same way as the options in the Associations area of the form.

Association Stores allow the user to organise their associations into different Associations worlds. For
details on the Association World creation refer to

 Association Stores allow the user to organise their associations into different Associations worlds. For
details on Association World creation refer to Training Guide TM-2252 - Project Administration.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 238
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

9.43 Standard Model Library

The purpose of the Standard Model Library is to provide an easy to use method of collecting multi-discipline
design data that can be copied and then placed elsewhere in the model. While this function is available to all
users it may be sensible if the use of the creation functions is restricted to lead users, simply to ensure good
housekeeping. Also the user must have write access to the elements in order to add them to the Standard
Model Library.

 The creation of Standard Model Library elements is covered in Training Guide TM-2252 - Project
Administration.

9.43.1 Placing Items from the Standard Model Library

The first task is to create a Site named SML_Site, and a Zone named
SML_Zone where the placed Standard Model Library item is to be stored.

Navigate to Zone SML_Zone, and from the main menu select Create > From Standard Model Library…
from the main pull down menu.

At first use, there will be no Standard Model Library data in the project. In this event, the user is prompted to
load sample Standard Model Library test data. Click Yes on the form and the sample data is loaded into the
MDB, owned by an Application Data World (APPLDW).

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 239
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Create Standard Model Library Item form is displayed, with the loaded sample data available from the
Library and Library Area pull-down menus.

The upper section of the form shows the Storage Zone and
contains a Zone button that allows the user to navigate to an
alternative if required.

 If the Item to be placed is a Zone then it will have the same


owner as the Storage Zone shown on the form.

If the user is positioned incorrectly in the Design Explorer a


warning is provided on the form.

The Toggle Name/Description check box will switch between


the Library Items names and descriptions in the grid..

The pull downs adjacent to the Library and Library Area allow
the user to select alternative items. The Items held by the
selected Area are then listed. Selecting an Item will show the
graphical representation on the bottom of the form.

 Consideration needs to be made for items such as this that contain multi-discipline elements, in this
case STRU and EQUI, as to whether this is consistent with the current database structure.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 240
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The New Instance section of the form allows the user to specify a name and orientation prior to the creation
of the elements.

The Name given to the new instance acts differently, depending on the collection method that was used to
create the Standard Model Library item.

For instance if multiple elements have been collected then the name
will be used for the owning Zone. This will require the members to
renamed accordingly.

However if a single STRU, EQUI, PIPE OR HVAC element has been


collected on its own then the name will apply to that element, and the
element is created beneath the specified Zone.

Auto-naming can be applied, if a rule exists by checking the box. This


will grey out the Name text field as it is no longer appropriate.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 241
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Once the name and orientation information have been completed the user can click the Create and
Position link label. The Positioning Control toolbar becomes active allowing the user to make various
selections to position the origin of the element. Specifying a position in the graphical display will result in the
creation of the elements, adding them to the graphical view and the Design Explorer.

In this example, the Two Pumps vertical arrangement library


item has been selected, and the name Pumps_and_Foundation
entered into the Name text box.

Clicking the Create and Position link label will activate the Positioning
Control toolbar, allowing the user to either graphically pick a position for
the new instance, or using the Explicit Position option. In this case, click the
Explicit Position button to display the Ship Position form. Leave the
position as default (X0, Y0, Z0) then click Apply.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 242
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The two EQUI elements and the STRU (foundation) are created. As there are multiple elements in the
Standard Model Library item selected, they are created beneath a new Zone.

The user may continue placing the same Item as many times as required.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 243
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 244
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 10
www.aCHAPTER
6
10 Search Utility
www.aveva.com
The Search utility form is displayed by selecting Display > Search from the main menu.
CHAPTER 3

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
245
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.1 Introduction

The Search tool enables the user to search for model items in the Dabacon database, subject to filters and
to be able to list the search results in a table / grid. The user will be able to specify one or more item types
(separated by spaces, commas or semi-colons) to search and be able to set scope & attribute filters for the
search. The user will be able to select the items listed in the search result table, and perform actions on this
selection.

To commence the search the user should press the Search button.

 As soon as the search is underway the text on the Search button changes to Stop, and this can be
pressed at any time to terminate the search
 It may take a considerable period of time to output a large amount of data into the output table, even
after stopping the search.
 The amount of elements found during the search is shown within the form
during the search.

The Search Tool will automatically open the Search Results table
and populate the table with the search results.

 If the Search Results form is closed, it can be opened at


any time by selecting the Display Search Results link label
on the Search form

10.1.1 Item Type

The user can specify one or more item types to be searched for, separated by spaces in the item type
combo-box, such as;

The search tool remembers the history for the current session in the drop down combo-box. The user can
clear the history at any time by selecting Clear History at the bottom of the combo-box.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 246
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.1.2 Search Filters

The user can set various scopes for the search. When the search tool is first opened during a session, then
the default scope will have the world element as the ceiling of the search within the current database (i.e.
Design, if within the Design application).

The In Database pull-down menu can be used to


search other MDBs, such as Catalog.

The various search filters which can be set are


listed below.

 It is possible to mix Beneath Item and In


Volume filters.

10.1.2.1 Hierarchical Search beneath a Ceiling

The user can enter the name of an existing database item to use as the ceiling in the ownership hierarchy.
All found items will exist in this ownership hierarchy. This is not a volumetric search. The database combo-
box will automatically update if the database item exists in any of the visible databases. Similarly, if the user
changes the database type in the combo-box then the database item currently displayed will be checked,
and if not found in that database then it will be reset to world.

The databases listed in the combo-box are those that are available to the user in the current session.

The database item which the user enters will be remembered throughout the session in the combo-box. This
history can be cleared.

10.1.2.2 Search within Element List

This option allows the user to set a list of elements to be considered in the
search. The options available include using the current Drawlist, and the
elements contained in My Data.

10.1.2.3 Volumetric Search within an existing model item, or a 3D box

The user can specify an existing model item for the scope of the search This is a volumetric search and not
an ownership (hierarchical) type search. The found items will reside within the volume of the specified model
item. Alternatively, the user can specify the opposite 2 corners of a 3D box in which to conduct the search.

 There are options with either of these searches to specify whether the found items exist completely or
partially within the specified volume
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 247
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.1.3 Attribute Filters

The user can set one or more attribute filters for the
search. The specified attributes will apply to each item
type listed. If there is more than one attribute filter
specified then the found items will satisfy all of the attribute
filters.

The system will recognise the type of each attribute entered


by the user and provide appropriate operator conditions in
the Operator field (i.e. contains, starts with, less then, etc.),
and the Value field will be available for the user to enter an
appropriate value. The user will not be able to set the
operator or value fields before an attribute name is
specified. Of particular note are the In List and In Range
operators.

10.1.3.1 In List operator

This enables the user to specify a list of values (separated by spaces) these can be numeric or non-numeric,
depending on the type of the attribute. i.e., Attribute = AREA, Operator = In the list, Value = 0 2 3, would find
items which have AREA attribute equal to either 0 or 2 or 3.

10.1.3.2 In Range operator

This enables the user to specify a range of 2 numeric values i.e. an upper and a lower limit which includes
the lower and upper limit. So, i.e., Attribute = AREA, Operator = In the range, Value = 1 10, would find items
which have AREA attribute equal to any numeric value between and including 1 and 10.

If the Attribute is changed once it is in the grid, then the Operator and Value fields will update accordingly.

 Attribute filters can be removed from the grid by selecting one or more rows, and then either clicking
Delete Filter from the form, or hitting the delete key.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 248
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2 General Functionality on the Search Results Form

The search results will be output to a separate Search Results form (containing a tabular control). The user
can specify the columns that are displayed. Each column represents an attribute of the item. The user will
be able to display and hide the search results form. The user can select either one or more rows in the
Search Results form and perform specified actions on this data. i.e., within Design, the user can drag &
drop one or more items into the 3D graphical view. All menu actions can be specified within the Aveva
customisable menu builder application.

All Search Results functionality is accessible through the right-mouse menus.

 This functionality does not apply when there is no data in the


output form

10.2.1 Displaying Search Results in Separate Tabs

Multiple search results can be displayed in the Search Results form via selectable tabs. This is activated by
the Display Search Results in Separate Tab checkbox. The effects on the Search Results form are
described below.

10.2.1.1 Single Displayed Search Results (Checkbox Unchecked)

With the checkbox unchecked, the search result will be displayed in the default tab Search Results 1. Any
further searches performed with the checkbox unchecked will overwrite the results in the Search Results
1.tab.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 249
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.1.2 Searches Displayed in a Separate Tab (Checkbox Checked)

With the Display Search Results in Separate Tab checkbox checked, a new search will be added to the
Search Results form as a new tab, numbered sequentially (Search Results 1, Search Results 2 etc.).
Clicking on the tab will display the search results in the form. Earlier results can be re-displayed by clicking
the appropriate tab.

10.2.1.3 Saved Searches

The user can save the current search by clicking


on the Create ‟Saved Search‟ Based on
Current Search Criteria link label.

This will open the Create Saved Search form allowing the user to
key in a name for the search.

 Currently there is only one option below the Location pull down,
Local Settings.

Clicking the OK button will add the search to the Saved Searches section of the form.

The saved search currently highlighted in the


form can be deleted by clicking the Delete
Selected Saved Search link label.

This will open the Delete Search form, clicking the YES button will
complete the deletion.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 250
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

With the Display Search Results in Separate Tab checkbox checked, a Saved Search will be added to the
Search Results form as a new tab, with the name of the saved search as the tab caption.

If a tab for the same saved search already exists, then that tab is used and the search results contained are
overwritten.

Existing Saved Searches can also be accessed at any time without having the Search Utility form open by
using the Search toolbar. The user can navigate to the required search via the pull down and click the Run
Search button on the toolbar.

10.2.1.4 Synchronizing the Search Form from the Search Results Tab

The information in the Search form can be populated with the criteria used for a selected search result tab

Right-click on the required search result tab and select


Synchronize Tab with Search.

The Search form is updated with the criteria used for the selected
search results.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 251
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.1.5 Unchecking „Display Search Results in Separate Tab‟

When unchecking the Display Search Results in Separate Tab checkbox, any subsequent search results
will appear in the default tab, Search Results 1. Other search results tabs created previously will remain in
the Search Results form, and can still be displayed.

10.2.1.6 Closing search results tabs

Search results tabs can be closed by selecting the tab to be deleted, and clicking the X adjacent to the tabs
in the form.

 It is not possible to close the default tab Search Results 1.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 252
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.2 Setting of Columns in the Tabular Control

Attribute columns can be created, modified and deleted with the Column settings function.

The user can change the order of columns, as well as deleting and adding columns.

10.2.2.1 Column Setup

Run a standard search for Equipments having FWC within their name.

Now, from the Search Results form, click the right mouse button near the
top of the form and select Column Setup. The Column Setup form
appears. Now click the Add Column link at the bottom of the form. Key in
the attribute and the Heading and then click the OK button.

The Search Result form is now displayed with the new Description column added. There is no need to run
the search again to display the Search Results form with the added column.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 253
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.2.2 Clear Results

The Clear Results will remove all results from the Search Results form. Click the right mouse button and
select Clear Results

10.2.2.3 Enable Group Sorting

The Enable Group Sorting option allows the column Headers to be dragged into the top section of the
Search Results form and this will sort them. In the example under item description the unset description
has 3 items.

From the Search Results form, Click the right mouse button and select Enable Group Sorting

Now drag a column header into the displayed top section.

This will now display the dragged column into sorted groups by what the column header was i.e. Item
Description.

 More than one Column Header can be


dragged into the top section for Group
Sorting
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 254
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.2.4 Enable Filtering

If Enable Filtering is activated, in the Search Results form under each heading, there is now the possibility
to filter the search results. The column can be filtered with the values in each cell in the column, or a Text
Filter can be added, with options such as Include, Begins With etc.

10.2.2.5 Enable Column Sort

If the Enable Column Sort option is active then the data in the columns
can be sorted, alpha-numerically, by clicking the column header, if it is
deactivated then the user cannot sort the data in the column by clicking
on the header.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 255
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.2.6 Suppress “unset” / “Nulref” values

This option removes from the table “unset” and “nulref” text, being useful when search result is to be printed
or saved. The item is still displayed in the Search Results table.

10.2.2.7 Interaction Mode

The search table can be used to edit the Attributes of one item or many items at the same time.

Read Only locks the value of the attributes in the entire search results table, preventing them from being
edited.

Single Cell Edit assures that only one value can be changed at a time.
Common editing functions can be used.

Bulk Cell Edit allows the user to apply the same change
to many items.

For this option, beside Copy and Paste, functions like


Fill Down and Fill Up are present, helping when
multiple-changes are required.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 256
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.2.8 Feedback Colours

Feedback colours are displayed in the Search Results table cells to inform the user if a cell is locked, has
been edited successfully, or has failed editing. This visualisation of the cell status is useful when using the
Interaction Mode.

The colours displayed can be changed if desired using the Read Only Cell Colour, Edit Success Colour
and Edit Fail Colour options.

The colours can be returned back to the system default


settings by selecting the Reset Default Feedback Colours
option.

 Keeping the mouse over the attribute after the change attempt, will display a tooltip
informing the user on the status of the change. In cases where the update has
failed, the reason for the failure is given.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 257
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.2.9 Reset Cell Feedback

Removes feedback colour and feedback information on the cells.

10.2.2.10 Refresh

The Refresh option updates the information within the Search Result table.

10.2.2.11 Quick Reports

This enables the elements in the Search Results form to be used


to create a report. Selecting the Quick Reports option will display
the Quick Report form, where the user can select from pre-defined
Layout Templates to produce reports.

 The reports produced by this option are covered in detail in


Training Guide TM-****, Reporting

10.2.2.12 Export to Excel

This enables the search results table to be saved to a specified Excel file
(.xls).

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 258
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

10.2.2.13 Print Preview

This enables the search results to be previewed in a Print Preview window, and then printed.

10.2.3 Additional right click menus

There are also several additional right mouse button menus, which are activated by selecting the rows
required and then clicking the right mouse button, selecting one of the pop-up menu options.

These additional options are:

Remove Selected Rows This removes the Selected Rows from the Search Results form.

Navigate To This option navigates to the selected item in the Design Explorer to the item
and makes it the current element.

3D View This allows the user to:


Add to 3D View the selected item / items,
Add Connected item / items,
Add Within Volume,
Remove from the 3D View,
Highlight or Unhighlight from the 3D View.

Add To My Data This allows the user to add the selected item / items to My Data.

 The context sensitive menu available shown above is not available during the Bulk Cell Edit Interaction
mode.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 259
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 260
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 11
www.aCHAPTER

11 Status Control
6
www.aveva.com
Status Control allows the user the ability to control and report on the status of individual model elements as
they progress through their lifecycles.
CHAPTER 3
Equipment elements, Pipe elements, Hull elements, Catalogue elements, drawings etc can all have a status
assigned to allow for full control of all these elements during the design and production stages of their
lifecycle.

The Status Control data model defines a workflow as a status definition owning a set of Status Values.
Individual model objects reference the status value via a status link object as shown below. Status data is
stored on the status link objects the user does not need write access to the model object in order to set its
status. The status link objects are distributed globally with the model objects they refer to. They are not
visible to the end user, but the status data is available as pseudo attributes.

Outfitting or other constructor module database Dictionary database (Lexicon)

Globally distributed with


model objects

Status Link World

Status Definition

Status Link
Element Ref
Status Value Ref
Comment: Text

Equipment /XX9006

Pseudo Attribute
Design Status Value: Checked
Design Status Number: 80% Status Value

 For details on the setting up the Status Values refer to the Advanced System Administration
guide TM-2121

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
261
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

A typical example shown below could be applied to the modelling of equipment items.

11.1 Activating the Status Controller

From the main pull down menu select Display > Status Controller, the Status Controller form is
displayed. From the Status Layout pull down list select New Layout….

The Select Status Columns form is displayed. Select the check


boxes that are required to be displayed and then click the OK
button.

 The Status Columns selection is displayed in the Focus


Status toolbar.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 262
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The Default Status Profile is displayed showing all the elements as


set in the controllable element types from Lexicon. The elements
displayed in the grid can be filtered. In this example, only EQUI
elements owned by 311_EQUI are considered.

11.2 Status Control Toolbar

1. Promote
2. Demote
3. Edit Status
4. Remove Status
1 2 3 4 5 6
5. Status History
6. Statistical Report

11.3 Changing the Element‟s Status

From the Default Status Profile List select the element / elements that require their status to be changed and
then click the right mouse button, a context sensitive menu appears select Edit Status. The Status form is
displayed. From the Status section of the form use the pull down list to select the next status transition i.e.
Work_Pending, key in a comment if required and then click the Apply button.

 Until an initial status


value is set against an
element, the Promote
and Demote icons are
not active.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 263
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Once the initial status value has been set the Promote and Demote options are available either from the
right mouse click context sensitive menu or the Promote and Demote icons. This allows the element to
promoted or demoted in the sequence of the valid transactions (one sequence at a time).

or

 If the Edit Status is used more than one valid transaction may
be selected.

11.4 Removing Status

If the status is removed from the element, this will reset the element back to it‟s original state i.e. Not
Controlled. The Remove Status option is available either from the right mouse click context sensitive menu
or the Remove Status icon.

or

11.5 Status History

The Status History shows a full history of the element / elements as they have been promoted and demoted
through their life cycle. The Status History form shows Session, Date, User, Element, Event, Status
Definition, Status Value and Comment field. The Status History option is available either from the right
mouse click context sensitive menu or the Status History icon.

or

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 264
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

If the right mouse button is clicked while over the Status History list a context sensitive menu will appear,
this allows the user to:

Refresh This will refresh the Status History list to show


any updates since the form was original
opened.
Export to Excel This allows the user to export the Status History
list to Excel.
Print Preview This allows the user to see a print preview prior
to printing.

11.6 Statistical Reports

The Statistical Reports option allows the users to see a graphical representation of the status of an
element or a number of elements. Highlight the element / elements from the Default Status Profile form
then either select Statistical Report from the right mouse click context sensitive menu, or click the
Statistical Reports icon.

or

The Statistical Report is displayed

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 265
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

11.6.1 Changing the Graphical representation of the report

The graphical representation of the report can be changed,


click the right mouse button when the cursor is over the
Statistical Report, a context sensitive menu will appear,
select Chart Type > Bar Chart. The Graphical
representation of the report is changed to the newly
selected chart type.

The other options on the context sensitive menu are:

Chart Legend This allows the user to move the chart legend in the graphical
report either to Left, Right, Top, Bottom or turn it Off.
Print This allows the user to print the graphical report
Save This allows the user to save the graphical report to an .xml file
Load This allows the user to load a pre-saved graphical report back
from an .xml file
Refresh This allows the user to refresh the contents of the graph
report to show any updates since the report was originally
updated.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 266
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

11.6.1.1 Graphical Representation Examples

The following graphical representation styles are available

Bar Chart Bar Chart 3D Cylinder Bar Chart 3D

Stack Bar Chart 3D Cylinder Stack Bar Chart 3D Column Chart

Column Chart 3D Cylinder Column Chart 3D Stack Column Chart 3D

Cylinder Stack Column Chart 3D Pie Chart Pipe Chart 3D

11.6.2 Additional Graphical Report Features

Moving the cursor over an area on a


Graphical Report will highlight the segment,
and display details on this segment of the
graph, i.e. the segment Status, number of
items included, and the percentage of the
total number of elements in the report.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 267
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

If the graphical report has been generated, there are some additional features available, if the user selects
the portion of the report and then clicks the right mouse button a context sensitive menu appears, this allows
the user to

List Elements This displays a list of elements


from the graphical report that are
at this status value

Add To My Data This will add the elements at this


status value to the My Data form
as a new collection
Add To 3D View This will add the elements at this
status value to the graphical 3D
view in Outfitting

Edit Status This allows the user to edit the status of the elements at this status value to either
promote of demote the status
Status History This will display the Status History form

11.6.3 The Element Interaction Toolbar

The Element Interaction Toolbar has three options:

Select CE in Grid – This option will select and highlight the Current Element in
the Design Explorer in the Status grid. If the Current Element is not contained
in the Status Grid this option is unavailable.

Select CE Members in Grid – This option will select and highlight the
member or members of the Current Element which are present in the Status
Grid. If the Current Element does not own any elements which exist in the
Status grid, a message is displayed.

Select Graphical Selection in Grid – this option will select and highlight all
elements in the Status grid which are currently selected in the 3D graphical
view. If none of the elements which are graphically selected exist in the Status
grid, a message is displayed.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 268
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

11.7 Saving a Status Layout

Save Status Layout allows the user to save the current layout and then
activate this if required from the Status Layout pull down menu. Click the
Save Status Layout icon and the Save Layout As form is displayed. Key in
Equipment_Status and click the OK button. The saved Status Layout is now
visible in the Status Layout pull down menu.

 If the Equipment _Status is to be removed then this needs deleting from the C:\Documents and
Settings\<user name>\Local Settings\Application Data\Aveva\Pdms\MARStatusGridProfiles folder

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 269
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 270
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 12
www.aCHAPTER
6
12 Generating Equipment Reports
www.aveva.com
The AVEVA Marine database stores a large amount of 3D engineering information about the marine model.
CHAPTER 3
The user can extract this data both graphically, in the form of drawings, or in text form, by producing reports.
This chapter describes the principles and practice of producing reports.

The user can produce a report by running a report template (Reports) or one based on their own selection
criteria (Quick Reports) from within the Outfitting module, or by running a unique Equipment Report.

12.1 Equipment Reports

To activate the Equipment Reports select Utilities > Equipment Report…, the Equipment Report form is
displayed.

The user can add and remove Attributes / Pseudo Attributes from the Available Attribute section of the
Equipment Report form and using the right and left arrow keys to move selected or all Available Attributes
over to the Chosen Attribute section of the Equipment Report form.
1. Add Selected Attributes to the Chosen Attributes List
2. Add All Attributes to the Chosen Attribute List
3. Remove Selected Attributes from the Chosen Attribute List
4. Remove All Attributes from the Chosen Attribute List
Once the selected attributes have been moved over to the Chosen Attribute section then can be sorted
using the up and down arrow keys.

Three different report types are available from


the report Type pull down list, Equipment ,
Nozzles and Electrical Components

The Scope pull down allows the user to have a


scope of All or Current Element
1. Move Selected Attributes to the Top of the List
2. Move Selected Attributes up in the List
3. Move Selected Attributes Down in the List www.aveva.com
4. Move Selected Attributes to the Bottom of the List
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
271
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

By selecting the Output tab at the


top of the Equipment Report form
the Equipment Report is
automatically created in an output
grid.

 Currently either all equipment items in the current MDB, or equipment which is the CE or owned by the
CE, are reported on. In the future it would be expected to be able to populate the list of required
equipment from the search form
 To filter the report output the user can use the normal grid functionality. Sorting and modification of
columns can also be done using the standard grid options

When the Equipment Report is in the format required it can then be saved to an Excel file using the Export
to Excel button. This will bring up the windows file browser and allow the user to navigate to the required
directory and then click the Save button to save the equipment report.

The saved .xls file can be opened in Excel and then the user can use the normal Excel functionality to save
the file as a csv or tab separated .txt file if required.

After creating the .xls file, it can be opened


from the Equipment Report form by
clicking the Open in Excel .

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 272
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

12.2 Standard Reporting

A template specifies what the report will contain, whether it will be sent to the screen or a file, and how it will
be structured.

There is a directory of example reports supplied with the product. This can be found in the directory
$PDMSUI/REPORTS. Under this directory is a TEMPLATES directory. This contains sample templates
which can be used to generate standard reports. The templates are AVEVA Marine macros. The best way to
see how they are defined is to select Utilities > Standard Reporting > Reports > Modify from the main
menu, and look at the settings for the fields on the forms displayed.

Templates have the file extension .tmp, and the


corresponding reports have a file extension .rep.

Most of the examples are based on the sample project


supplied with the product.

Here is a list of some of the sample templates and the types of report produced:-

nozz_sched This is a Nozzle schedule, which lists all Nozzles sorted by name, and shows the
P1 bore, connection type and direction, and the position of each Nozzle.

line_list This report will list Branches, sorted by the name of the Pipe which owns them. The
Pipe Specification, the Head and Tail bores and the Head and Tail references are
given.

pipe_mto This report shows material information for all Branch members, sorted by type,
Detail Text and Material Text. The Tube length and quantity of each component are
totalled. There is an Imperial version of this report template.

tube_mto This report totals all Tubing. The Specification Reference, P1 Bore, Detail Text and
Material Text are shown.

steel_mto This is a material take-off list for structural components.

valve_list This report is an example of selective reporting.

centre_line The centre-line length of each Branch is listed. There is an Imperial version of this
report template.

tube_gradient This report gives the gradient of each tubing component.

catalogue_param This report lists Branch members, with their CATREFs and the parameters of the
CATREFs.

catalogue_ptgmref This report lists Branch members, with their CATREFs followed by the PTREFs and
GMREFs of the CATREFs.

tube_area_vol This report uses derived properties to report on the area and volume of tubing.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 273
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

12.3 Running a Report from a Saved Template (Worked Example)

Select Utilities > Standard Reporting > Reports > Run

A Windows file browser will be displayed. Navigate to where the Report Templates are held i.e.
C:\AVEVA\Marine\OH12.0.SPx\pdmsui\reports\templates, this shows all the available Template Reports.

Select the report template required i.e. nozz_sched.tmp and click the Open button. The Report Details
form will be displayed. On this form the user will need to complete all fields. The information requested by
this form is dependent on the settings of the Runtime Prompts form, defined during the template creation.

The information required by this form is totally dependent on what has been defined within the Template.
Other questions that could be asked by this form are shown below. In the above case the following fields
should be completed.

 Filename - If the user specifies a filename, the report will be sent to the given file in the current
directory. If the user leaves this field empty the report will be sent to the screen.

 Hierarchy - Here the user should specify the elements from where the report should start its search.
The report will be produced for all these elements and elements owned by them.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 274
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

The following are other questions that can be asked depending on the set up of the Template:-

 Types - Here the user should state all element Types that are to be reported on. The report will be
produced for all the elements given.

 With - Defines the criteria that must match the elements before they will be reported on. This is
sometimes referred to as a filter but works in the same way as the other occurrences in AVEVA
Marine.

 Volume - Allows the setting of Limits. The report may be generated on elements that are
Completely or Partially Within the limits.

 From - Allows the user to specify where the search will take place. The Default is MDB

 Creating a report template is covered in AVEVA Project Administration (Outfitting) (TM-2252)


Guide

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 275
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

12.4 Quick Reports

The Create Quick Report form is displayed by selecting Utilities > Quick Reports from the main pull down
menu. This form allows the user to create reports with only basic formatting. This template cannot be saved.

The user can enter a filename for the output report. If the user just wants to see the report on the screen,
leave the File text box blank, or check the Term checkbox, in which case any filename given will be ignored.
If Term is checked, a window will be displayed to show the results or the report, unless there is already a
form currently displayed to which the results may be written to.

The options performed by the buttons on the Quick Reports form are as follows;

Types AVEVA Marine element types can be specified. i.e. EQUI


With This option is a way of narrowing down the report. Enter an AVEVA Marine expression
Columns These are the AVEVA Marine attributes to be output in the report. The attributes specified
will be used as headings to the column. The user can enter expressions, enclosed in round
brackets. The following example outputs the type, name, and the first three characters of the
owner's name. i.e. type name (substr (name of owner, 1, 3))
Hierarchy Enter the element or elements at the top of the hierarchy that the user wants to report on.
Because the user can give a list of elements, the user must enter the slash character before
each name, except for WORLD. i.e. /311-EQUIP

12.4.1 Generating the Report

Click the Apply button when ready to generate the report.

 If the Command Window is active this is where the Quick


Report will be displayed

Exercise 6 Reports

Practice the use of Equipment Reports and Quick Reports

Run the reports Equipment_Report.tmp and nozz_sched.tmp to show the type of output created
.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 276
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 13
www.aCHAPTER
6
13 Mass Properties
www.aveva.com
13.1 Mass Properties
CHAPTER 3
Mass Property values may be calculated for AVEVA Marine elements using the Mass properties utility.
Selecting Utilities > Mass Properties shows the three options available.

 Weight and Centre of Gravity


 Surface Area
 Volume

13.1.1 Weight and Centre of Gravity

The Weight and Centre of Gravity (CofG) form is divided into


four areas, which allow the user to define the element or
elements which are to be considered for the Weight and CofG
calculation, and determine the calculation settings.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
277
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.1.1 Add Elements

This area is used to determine which elements are added to


the Selected Elements grid

The pull-down menu gives various methods of adding


elements to the Selected Elements grid.

 Current Element – Adds the Current Element to the grid.

 Element Members – Adds all the elements owned by the Current Element.

 Members with TUBI – Adds the elements owned by the Current Element, plus any implied tubing
(TUBI) elements in Pipe or HVAC branch elements.

 TUBI elements are the ‘implied’ straight lengths of pipe or HVAC


between modelled components. TUBI elements can be displayed in
the Design Explorer by checking the Show TUBI/ROD checkbox in
the Explorer Settings form.

 Current List – Adds all the elements contained in a List

 Graphical Pick – Prompts the user to graphically pick elements in the 3D view to be added to the
grid.

 Graphical Selection – Allows the user to add pre-selected elements to the grid.

 Within Area – Adds all elements which are located within a picked AREADE Room Design
element..

 Within Volume of CE – Allows the user to add in elements which are within the volume boundary of
the Current Element.

Clicking the Add button adjacent to the pull-down menu adds the selection to the grid.

The selected elements are displayed in the Selected Elements grid

The Named Element text box allows the user to enter the name of
the element to be added to the Selected Elements grid. Clicking the
Add button adjacent to the textbox will add this element to the grid.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 278
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.1.2 Selected Elements Grid

The elements selected in the Add Elements section of the form are
displayed in the Selected Elements grid. Grid gadget options are
available, for removing, navigating to etc. by right-mouse clicking on
elements in the grid.

 Remove Selected Element(s) – Removes the selected element or elements from the grid.

 Remove All Elements – Clears all elements from the grid.

 Enhance in 3D View – Highlights all elements in the grid in the 3D View.

 Unenhance in 3D View – Un-highlights all the elements in the 3D View.

 Navigate to – Activating Navigate To wil make the element selected


in the grid the Current Element in the Design Explorer.

 Export to Excel – Allows the grid to be saved as an Excel file.

 Print Preview – Opens the Print Preview window, showing a print preview of the grid.

The elements are displayed in the grid. The example below shows the
different results when selecting Element Members and Members with
TUBI from a Pipe Branch element.

Element Members Members with TUBI


www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 279
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.1.3 Settings

The Settings section of the forms has options for specific Mass
Property Settings. The main Settings determine if the calculations are
to consider certain criteria:

Wet/Dry settings are primarily for Piping and Equipment with fluids:

 Dry Weight is the Normal Component weight


 Wet Weight will consider the Normal Component weight plus the contained fluid weight.

The following options are available from the Negatives pull-down list:

 Consider (net) will consider all holes when calculating the mass.
 Ignore (gross) will ignore all holes when calculating the mass.
 Ignore (rough) will ignore all holes when calculating the mass. The specific meaning of 'rough' as
opposed to 'gross' is that rough will be a quicker, but less accurate calculation. This
is sometimes useful for large amounts of data or components with complex shapes.

Weight of has the following options:

 Element Only considers the geometry of the element only


 All Members considers the element plus the geometry of all of the element members

Representation Level determines the geometry at a certain representation level to be used for the
calculation. For instance, the Representation for a complex item of equipment may be drawn as a simple
block outline at Representation Level 1. The more complex detail may be added at Representation level 6.
The complex shape would require a complex calculation of the surface area which would take longer to
process.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 280
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.1.4 Within Area

The Within Area section of the form allows the user to


identify elements contained within an AREADE element
limits. AREADE elements are created as part of the
Room Design application. Only the elements already
added to the Selected Elements grid will be considered.

The Area textbox allows the user to input the name of the AREADE
element to be used. The Pick button adjacent to the textbox allows the
AREADE element to be graphically picked in the 3D view.

The Option pull-down menu has two choices:

 Weight Inside – Calculates the Weight and CofG for elements in the Selected Elements list, which
also fall inside the specified AREADE element.

 Weight Outside - Calculates the Weight and CofG for elements in the Selected Elements list, which
also fall outside the specified AREADE element.

13.1.1.5 Calculate Weight and Centre of Gravity (CofG)

This area of the form will display the calculated total weight and centre of gravity position for the selected
elements. Clicking the Apply button will display the total weight and overall centre of gravity of the selected
elements. The position of the centre of gravity is shown graphically in the 3D view.

The individual element weights and centre of


gravity position are also displayed in the
Selected Elements grid.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 281
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.2 Surface Area

The Surface form is divided into five areas, similar to the


Weight and Centre of Gravity form, but with the addition of the
Within Area option. These options allow the user to define the
element or elements which are to be considered for the Surface
Area calculation, and determine the calculation settings.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 282
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.2.1 Add Elements

This area is used to determine which elements are added to


the Selected Elements grid

The pull-down menu gives various methods of adding


elements to the Selected Elements grid.

 Current Element – Adds the Current Element to the grid.

 Element Members (UN-UNIONED) – Adds all the elements owned by the Current Element. All
elements in the grid will be treated as individual items, and the surface area of each item is
calculated. Any overlaps of elements is ignored.

 Members with TUBI (UN-UNIONED) – Adds the elements owned by the Current Element, plus any
implied tubing (TUBI) elements in Pipe or HVAC branch elements. Again, overlaps between
elements are ignored in the calculation,

 Current List – Adds all the elements contained in a List

 Graphical Pick – Prompts the user to graphically pick elements in the 3D view to be added to the
grid.

 Graphical Selection – Allows the user to add pre-selected elements to the grid.

 Within Volume of CE – Allows the user to add in elements which are within the volume boundary of
the Current Element.

Clicking the Add button adjacent to the pull-down menu adds the selection to the grid.

The selected elements are displayed in the Selected Elements grid

The Named Element text box allows the user to enter the name of
the element to be added to the Selected Elements grid. Clicking the
Add button adjacent to the textbox will add this element to the grid.

The Selected Elements section of the form behaves in the same was as described for the Weight and
Centre of Gravity form.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 283
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.2.2 Settings

The Settings area of the form is similar to the Weight and


Centre of Gravity form, with the same options for Negatives
and Representation level. There are two other options
availavle

The Surface Of pull-down menu has the following options:

 All Members – Considers the Surface Area of the element plus the geometry of all the element
members. An example of this would be a structural Panel (PANE) element which owned a fitting
such as a manhole.

 Element Only – Considers the geometry of the element only.

The Units pull-down is used to select the units the surface area will
be displayed in.

13.1.2.3 Within Area

The Within Area section of the form allows the user to


identify elements contained within an AREADE element
limits. AREADE elements are created as part of the
Room Design application. Only the elements already
added to the Selected Elements grid will be considered.

The Area textbox allows the user to input the name of the AREADE
element to be used. The Pick button adjacent to the textbox allows the
AREADE element to be graphically picked in the 3D view.

The Option pull-down menu has two choices:

 Surface Inside – Calculates the surface area for elements in the Selected Elements list, which also
fall inside the specified AREADE element.

 Surface Outside - Calculates the surface area for elements in the Selected Elements list, which
also fall outside the specified AREADE element.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 284
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

13.1.2.4 Calculate Surface

The Calculate Surface section of the form displays the total


Surface Area of the selected elements. The surface area of
each individual element is also shown in the grid.

Selecting an element in the grid will also display the surface area of that element in the 3D view.

13.1.3 Volume

The Volume form is similar to the


Surface form, with the same options in
the Add Elements, the Selected
Elements grid and Within Area
sections of the form.

The only difference are the Units the


element volumes are displayed in, which
are in cubic mm, cm etc.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 285
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 286
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 14
www.aCHAPTER
6
14 Clash Detection
www.aveva.com
Clash Detection allows the user to check their design continuously for spatial clashes, that is, to identify
CHAPTER 3
different design items that are competing for the same space. To do this, the 3D clash utility within Outfitting
is used. This utility is very useful when working in confined spaces where there is a chance that the user
may have two or more items competing for the same space.

When working with On-Line Clash Detection with Piping, unfinished branches will show any clashes as they
occur, enabling the user to correct the error before moving on in the design. Although a pipe may be
continuously checked for clashes it still must be Data Consistency checked and any errors found rectified
before the user begins a full clash check.

 Data Consistency is covered in AVEVA Pipework Modelling (TM-2220) Guide

14.1 Set-up and Defaults

14.1.1 Clashes which are Not Reported

Clashes are normally reported for each pair of design primitives, piping components or steelwork
components that interfere, with the exception of interferences between the following pairs of items;

 Primitives belonging to the same equipment.


 Two structure or substructure primitives having the same owner.
 Two piping components that are connected.
 A piping component and the nozzle to which it is connected.
 Any component or primitive that has its obstruction value set to zero.

14.1.2 Invoke the 3D Clash Utility

There are two ways of using the facility;

 The On-Line clash utility can be used at the same time as


using one of the Applications. It can be switched on by clicking
the Auto Clash button on the Utilities Toolbar. This will show
any clashes as they occur.

However the user may just check for any clashes after creating or moving elements, using the Clashes
option.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
287
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

14.1.3 Invoke the 3D Clash Utility

The clasher utility is activated by selecting Utilities > Clashes from the
main pull down menu.

The Clashes form is displayed; this form has several tabs for Clashes, Obstruction/Exclusions, Limits,
Options and Report, and a 3D graphical view for visualisation of the clash.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 288
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

14.2 Clashes

The Check field can be populated by keying in a valid element name or by navigating to the required
element to be checked using the Design Explorer and then clicking the Check CE link label.

The Clash is the element penetrating / hitting / interfering with the obstruction. The clashes results will be
displayed in the Clashes window and also graphically in a clipped 3D view.

There is a context sensitive menu available on clicking the right mouse


button for Print Preview and Save to Excel.

The 3D graphical display can be changed using the Clipping, this can be turned on or off by checking the
Clip Box, the clipping limits can also be increased or decreased by either keying in a new value or moving
the slider

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 289
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

14.3 Obstructions/Exclusions

The Obstruction/Exclusion allows the user to filter the elements to be clash checked, the user adds the
elements to the Obstruction/Exclusion list by selecting the item from the Design Explorer and then clicking
the Add button making sure that the Current Element
has been selected from the pull down list.

By default the obstruction list contains All design


elements in the current MDB. Items may be removed
from the list by using the Remove button. If i.e. a site
were added, none of its members would be shown in
the list, although they are included. If an element below
the site was not to be part of the obstruction list i.e. a
zone, then the user must add this to the Exclusion List.
This list is created in the same way as the obstruction
list but contains elements that are not to be considered
as obstructions.

There are additional ways to add elements to the list


using the context sensitive pull down menu

14.4 Limits

Creating an Obstruction/Exclusion list is not the list is not


the only way to set the obstructions; the user may wish to
have an area around items or a region that is to be used.
This can be achieved by using limits tab to create an
obstruction box. Any element that lies partly or wholly within
the limits box will be checked. A clash between items that
lie partially within the limits box will always be reported,
even if the point at which the clash occurs lies outside the
box.

The From and To limits display can be changed by clicking


the right mouse button, this will display a context sensitive
menu allowing the user to change to Format XYZ, Format
ENU or Format Grid

The user may set limits by using one of the options from the pull
down list, i.e. Current Element, Picked Elements, Defined by
2 Picks, Current Selection or by Current List. The use of the
Clear button will cause the values defining the corners of the
box to be set to zero. A setting of zero in all fields will, by
default, include all elements and primitives in the current MDB.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 290
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

14.5 Options

From the Clashes form, select the Options tab. The


Options tab consists of five sections: Tolerances, Clash
options, Presentation, Clash colours and Clashes
Ignored Within.

 The Reset System Defaults link label will restore the


system default back to the original installation
settings.

14.5.1 Tolerances

Overlap(Normal clash) - where the primitives overlap by more than a


specified amount.

Touch Gap - where the primitives overlap by less than a specified


amount, or where they are separated by less than a specified distance.

Clearance - where the primitives are separated by more than the


amount necessary to constitute a touch, but less than a specified
clearance distance.

Overlap greater Overlap less Gap less Separation more than


than 5mm than 5mm than 2mm 2mm but less than 8mm

A Clash Touches A Clearance

If x is the distance by which items overlap or by which they are separated;

 If clearance distance greater than x, no clash will be found.


 If clearance distance less than x less than touch gap, a clearance will be found.
 If touch gap less than x less than touch overlap, a touch will be found.
 If touch overlap less than x, a clash will be found. www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 291
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

14.5.2 Clash Options

The user may whether or not Touches are included or ignored.

The user may also specify that clashes within a branch are included,
ignored adjacent or are ignored. This means that if a branch clashes
with itself then this clash can be ignored.

Another option is to set Connections to be are included, are ignored, or


with spec are ignored.

There is a checkbox to set Clash Midpoint position on or off.

14.5.3 Presentation

The Group Clash / Obstruction checking this box will present the results using
the Clash and Obstruction columns as default.

Other presentation aids are also available to the user for:

Clash Item Aid Clash Obstruction Aid Clash Position Aid

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 292
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

14.5.4 Clash Colours

3D-Clasher makes use of colours to highlight items that, from the set limits, that
are deemed to be clashing. The user can change the colour for the Major Clash
items, the Obstruction item and the View Background. This allows the
obstruction to be shown in a different colour to that of the clashing object,
highlighting the clash and the items involved.

14.5.5 Clashes Ignored Within

Clashes are normally reported for each pair of design primitives, piping components or steelwork
components that interfere, with the exception of interferences between the following pairs of items;

 Primitives belonging to the same equipment.


 Two structure or substructure primitives having the same owner.
 Two piping components that are connected.
 A piping component and the nozzle to which it is connected.
 Any component or primitive that has its obstruction value set to zero.

The user can now also select from by check box which elements can be
ignored within. i.e. if the SITE check box is checked then all elements within a
site will be ignored for clashes.

14.6 Report

The Report tab allows the user to report to a file when checking for clashes, by default the option will be
turned off and needs to be activated by checking the Report to file when checking for clashes check box.

The form allows the user several options,

Position – This allows the user to show / not


show the AT WORLD COORDINATES against
each element in the clash report.

Duplicate – This allows the user to choose to list


clashes only under first (default) / second or both
in the database hierarchy

Levels – This allows the user choose if the clash


report will be on Clashes, Clearances and
Touches or any combination of the three.

Listing – This allows the user to turn ON / OFF


the check for various types of element.

Report format – This allows the user to select from predefined formats to change the appearance of the
report.

Report to file – This allows the user to key in the name of a report or browse to an existing report to allow it
to be over filed.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 293
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

Exercise 7 - Clash Detection

1. Experiment with the clash detection utility using the various methods shown earlier.

2. Experiment with the Report functionality, changing various settings to see the different results.

3. Auto Clash – close the Clashes form, and turn on Auto Clasher. Experiment with moving an item of
Equipment so it interferes with other elements or hull structure.

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 294
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
APPENDIX A

15 Appendix A (AVEVA Marine Primitives)

15.1 The Box Element (BOX)

P4 P3 P2

P0
ZLENGTH
P1
P5 P6
P
0
XLENGTH YLENGTH

Special Attributes:
XLENGTH Dimension parallel to X-axis
YLENGTH Dimension parallel to Y-axis
ZLENGTH Dimension parallel to Z-axis

15.2 The Cylinder Element (CYLI)

The origin is at the centroid of the box and the seven P-Points are as shown (with P0 at the origin)
DIAMETER

HEIGHT

Special Attributes:
DIAMETER Diameter
HEIGHT Axial height

The origin of the cylinder is at the mid–point of the axis, the default orientation of the cylinder is with the axis
on the Z-axis, and seven P-Points are as shown.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
295
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

15.3 The Cone Element (CONE)

DTOP

HEIGHT

DBOTTOM

Special Attributes:
DTOP Diameter of top surface
DBOTTOM Diameter of bottom surface
HEIGHT Axial height

The origin of the cone is at the mid-point of the axis, the z-axis lies along the longitudinal axis of the cone.

15.4 The Dish Element (DISH)

HEIGHT

DIAMETER

RADIUS = 0 RADIUS = 70

Special Attributes:
DIAMETER Diameter of base.
HEIGHT Maximum height of dished surface above base.
RADIUS If the radius is set to zero, then the Dish is drawn as a section of a sphere. If the radius is
greater than zero, then the Dish is defined as half of an ellipsoid.

The origin of the Dish is at the centre of the base P0, and its Z–axis lies along the normal to the base.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 296
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

15.5 The Circular Torus Element (CTOR)

P1 P2
ANGLE

P0 RINSI ROUTS

Special Attributes:
RINSI Inside radius
ROUTS Outside radius
ANGLE Subtended angle (not allowed to be greater than 180 degrees)

The origin of the circular torus is at the centre of the circular arcs of radii RINSI and ROUTS, and is defined
in the X-Y plane

15.6 The Snout Element (SNOU)

DTOP

P1

XOFFSET
P0 HEIGHT

P2
YOFFSET

DBOTTOM

Special Attributes:
DTOP Diameter of top surface
DBOTTOM Diameter of bottom surface
XOFFSET Displacement of axes along X–axis
YOFFSET Displacement of axes along Y–axis
HEIGHT Perpendicular distance between surfaces

The origin of the Snout is at the mid–point of the line joining the centres of the top and bottom surfaces and
the Z–axis is normal to the top and bottom surfaces.
www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 297
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

15.7 The Pyramid Element (PYRA)


YTOP

XTOP P1

P0
HEIGHT YOFFSET

P2
XBOTTOM

YBOTTOM XOFFSET
Special Attributes:
XBOTTOM Dimension of bottom parallel to X–axis
YBOTTOM Dimension of bottom parallel to Y–axis
XTOP Dimension of top parallel to X–axis
YTOP Dimension of top parallel to Y–axis
HEIGHT Height between top and bottom surfaces
XOFFSET Displacement of axes along X–axis
YOFFSET Displacement of axes along Y–axis

The origin of the Pyramid is at the mid–point of the line joining the mid–points of the top and bottom
surfaces, and its Z–axis is normal to the top and bottom faces.

15.8 The Slope-Bottom Cylinder (SLCY)


DIAMETER DIAMETER

XTSHEAR
P1 P1

YTSHEAR

HEIGHT
P0 P0

XBSHEAR

P2 P2
YBSHEAR
Special Attributes:
DIAMETER Diameter
HEIGHT Height along axis, between P1 and P2
XTSHEAR Inclination of top face to X–axis
YTSHEAR Inclination of top face to Y–axis
XBSHEAR Inclination of bottom face to X–axis
YBSHEAR Inclination of bottom face to Y–axis

The origin of the slope–bottom cylinder is at the mid–point of the axis (mid–way between P1 and P2) and the
default orientation is with the axis on the Z–axis. www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 298
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

15.9 The Nozzle Element (NOZZ)

HEIGHT

P2
P0

P1

Nozzles are significant to the Design because they provide the link between the Equipment (which owns
them) and the Pipe (Branch) which is connected to each one. It may be helpful to think of a nozzle as being
a Equipment attachment point.

Special Attributes:
TEMPERATURE These information attributes can hold relevant Temperature &
PRESSURE Pressure ratings.
HEIGHT Controls the height of the Nozzle stem (assuming normal Catalogue conventions
are followed.)
CREF Connection Reference. Usually set automatically when a Branch is connected to a
Nozzle. It stores he name of the connected Branch. If it is not set, the Nozzle is not
connected to anything.
CATREF Provides the physical description of the Nozzle directly from the Catalogue. If it is
not set, then the Nozzle has no geometry.
DUTY 12–character text attribute describing the type of fluid handled by the Nozzle.

15.10 The Rectangular Torus Element (RTOR)

HEIGHT
P1 P2

ANGLE

RINSI
P0 ROUTS

Special Attributes:
RINSIDE Inside radius
ROUTSIDE Outside radius
HEIGHT Height between top and bottom surfaces
ANGLE Subtended angle (not allowed to be greater than 180 degrees)

The origin of the rectangular torus is at the centre of the arcs of radii RINSIDE and ROUTSIDE, and is
defined in the X-Y plane

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 299
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Marine (12.1)
Outfitting Foundations TM-2201

15.11 The Extrusion (EXTRU)

HEIGHT
P8 P2
P3
P0
P1
P7
P4

P6 P5

Special Attributes:
HEIGHT Height between top and bottom surfaces

By default, the first vertex created for the new extrusion will define its origin

15.12 Revolution (REVO)

P3
P4

P2
P1

360 Degrees Rotation 90 Degrees Rotation

Special Attributes:
ANGLE Subtended angle

www.aveva.com
© Copyright 1974 to current year. 300
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen